IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) A Z r^ 1.0 I.I 1^ us ■tt Bii ■22 £ Ufi 1 2:0 HA jJ5 |U ||.6 < 6" ► HiotogFaphic Sdences Corporation 23 WIST MAIN STtEIT WIUTEt,N.Y. MSM (716)872-4S03 \ '^ SJ S> CiHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/iCIVIH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Instituta for Hlatorlcal Microraproductions / Inatitut Canadian da microraproduetiona Idatafiquaa Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquaa Tha Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast original copy availabia for filming. Foaturas of this copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua, which may altar any of tha imagas in tha reproduction, or which may significantly change tha usual method of filming, are checked balow. r-7\ Coloured covers/ l\/l Couverture de couleur r~~1 Covers damaged/ D D D a D D Couverture endommagte Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^ at/ou pelliculie r~~| Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque Coloured mapa/ Cartes giographiquas an couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) r~~| Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Rail* avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrie peut causer de i'ombre ou de la distorsion l« long de la marge intirieur* Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certainas pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauration apparaissant dans le texte. mais, lorsque cela 6fait possible, ces pages n'ont pas M filmtes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentaires: L'Institut a microfilm* la meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Las details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-itre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m^thoda normaia da filmaga sont indiqute ci-dessous. {~n Coloured pages/ Pagea de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restauries at/ou pelliculAes Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages dicolortes, tachatAes ou piqudes Pages detached/ Pages ditach^es Showthroughy Transparence Quality of prir Qualiti inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary matarii Comprend du material suppl^mantaira Only edition available/ Seule idition disponible nn Pages detached/ r~7j Showthrough/ r~~| Quality of print varies/ |~n Includes supplementary material/ n~] Only edition available/ D Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc.. have been refilmed to ensure the best possible image/ Lea pages totalement ou partieilement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc.. ont iti fiimies i nouveau de fapon A obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X y 12X 16X 20X fm 28X 32X imm Th« copy film«d h«r« has b—n raproducad thanks to tha ganarosity of: D. B. Weldon Library University of Western Ontario Tha imagaa appaaring hara ara tha boat quality posaibia eonaidaring tha condition and lagibiiity of tha originai copy and in icaaping with tha filming contract spacifications. Original copiaa in printad papar eovars ara fllmad baginning with tha front covar and anding on tha last paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- sion, or tha back covar whan appropriata. All othar originai copiaa ara fllmad baginning on tha first paga with a printad or illuatratad impraa- sion, and anding on tha laat paga with a printad or illuatratad impraasion. Tha last racordad frama on aaeh microficha shall contain tha symbol -^ (moaning "CON- TINUED"), or tha symbol V (moaning "END"), whichavar applias. IMapa. platas. charts, ate., may ba fllmad at diffarant raduction ratios. Thosa too larga to ba antiraly includad in ona axpoaura ara fllmad baginning in tha uppar laft hand comar. laft to right and top to bottom, aa many framaa aa raquirad. Tha following diagrama illustrata tha mathod: L'axamplaira filmi fut raproduit grica i la ginirosit* da: D. B. Weldon Library University of Western Ontario Laa imagaa suivantaa ont 4tA raproduitaa avac la plus grand soin. compta tanu da la condition at da la nattat* da I'axampiaira filmA. at it conformit* avac las conditions du contrat da filmaga. Laa axamplairaa originaux dont la couvartura an papiar aat imprim4a sont filmte an comman^nt par la pramiar plat at an tarminant soit par la darnlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta d'impraaaion ou d'illustration, soit par la sacond plat, salon la caa. Tous laa autras axamplairaa originaux aont filmte it commandant par la pramlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta d'impraaaion ou d'illustration at an tarminant par la darniira paga qui comporta una talla amprainta. Un daa symbolaa suivants apparattra sur la damlAra imaga da chaqua microficha. salon la caa: la symbols -^ signif la "A SUiVRE", la symbols ▼ signifia "FIN". Laa cartaa, planchaa. tablaaux. ate. pauvant Atra filmte i daa taux da rMuction diffirants. Lorsqua la documant ast trop grand pour Atra raproduit an un saul ciichA, 11 ast film* i partir da I'angla supAriaur gaucha, da gaucha A droita. at da haut mi baa, an pranant la nombra d'imagas nAcassaira. Laa diagrammaa suivants illustrant la mAthoda. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 If' nil II! 1003267069 ^-J^:^ H'Vi IJNIVFPSITY OF WrSILRN ONTARIO LIBRARY Nhi'o ?oc^iL• *-•• ,j> ' iii , ^ [| ii« ( i »u iiiii I I ■ > ■! NEW CHARTS. CHAELES WILSON, UTE J. W. NORIE & WILSON, ♦ i57, Leadenhall Street, London. THE IHDIAH OCEAH ; comprising the Navigation from the Entrances to the Red Sea and Gulf of Persia to Karachi, Bombay, Ceylon, Coringah, Madras, Calcutta, Aracan, Rangoon, Moulmein, and Malacca ; including the Lacca- DivA Archipelago, Maldiva Islands, Bay of Bengal, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, and part of the Strait of Malacca and Island of Sumatra; with plans, on an enlarged scale, of the Bay of Aden, Karachi, Bombay Harbour, IT Colombo, Point de Galle and Trincomalie Harbours, Chittagong, Port Dalhousie, Rangoon, and Moulmein Rivers, and Amherst Road . . . . „ 12 Thif Chart, with C. Wilion's New Larg^ Scale Charts of , the Kediterraneaa Sea, in two parts : The Western— Gibral- tar to Sicily and Malta; The Eastern— Sicily and Malta to Port Said, will be fonnd very nsefol for Suez Canal Steaimers. TAe above Chart also forms the two following Charts. ADEN to BOMBAY and MADBAS, with plans, &c. . . .* 8 BAT of BENGAX and COASTS of INDIA, with plans, &c 8 T The SOTJTHEBN FABT of the INDIAN OCEAN, from the Cape of Good Hope to STJNDA STBAIT, the Eastern Passages and WESTEBN ATJSTEALIA 14 Or in two parts if preferred, viz : — The WESTEBN FABT from the CAPE of GOOD HOPE and Sart of East Coast of Africa to Zanzibar, &c., including Iozambique Channel, Madagascar, Isle of France, Bourbon or Reunion, &c., with plans of the principal harbours The EASTEBN PABT being the Continuation of the Cape Chart to Sunda Strait, the Eastern Passages, and Western Australia 7 6 ,^,. .. Tk$" Indian Oaan,** and the Chart or Charts "Southern Part of the AtdSam (kean,*' will shew the Navigation of the whole of the Indian Ocean A _^ . on a Large Scale, 80 PUBLl SAILING DIRECTIONS FOB THE GULF AND RIVER OF ST. UWRENCE. PUBLISHED BY CHARLES WILSQN, (Late J. W. Noris & WitsoN,) PUBLISHER OF CHARTS AND NAUTICAL ^OllX|l, fie. AT THE NAVIGATION WAREHOUSE AND NAVAL ACADRMT» \ '-\ 157, LEADENHALL STREET, E.C. 1871. l^'r^^ NOTES. Alterations and additional information will be g^ren in rapplementary pages as occasion may reqtiire, for which BXX ADDENDA; these are also transferred at once to the Ohart, which this book is intended to accompany ; so that it v, i may sometimes happen the Ohart itself has the later information. \ Any remarks or commmiioations from our Nautical friends, for the future improvement of this, or other of our works, are respectfully solicited. ABBREVIATIONS Adopted in this work ; althonj^ in some instances, where more explicit, the words are used in full length : — N north. S south. E east. W west. m. miles. B river. Bb rock. Lt light. Lt.-ho lighthouse. min minute. vis visible. fms. fathoms. ft foot — ^feet. Pt point. Id island. sand-bk sand-bank. Hd head. lat latitude. long. longitude. H.W high water. F. and C fuUandchange. ADDENDA. The following lights are required to be inserted, -viz. : — Page 48.— (4.) BABTIBOQUE, Loweb Newcastle.— Two white Lt.-hos., bearingN.E. and S.W. of each other, 36 ft. in height, and elevated 120 and 140ft. above H.'W., exhibiting fixed lights, vis. 10 m. N.B.— The lights Nos. 1, 3 and 4 are lighted only during the season of navigation. ij,767 tagesM laf erred I that it future d. CONTENTS. II PAOB The Magdalenfl, Antioosti, &o 3 The North Coast. From Cape Whittle to the B. St. John, including the Mingan Ids Oape Breton Id. (East Ooast), from Oape ITorth to the Ghit of Ofuo .' 16 Oape Breton Id. (West Ooast), from Oape North to the Gut of Oanso 23 The South Ooast of the Gulf, Prince Edward Id. and Northumberland Strait. 26 Prinoi^ Edward Island 36 The North Ooast of Prince Edward Id., from East Point to North Point 42 The Western Ooast of the Gxdf . From Point Esoumenao to Oape Qaspi ; the Bays of Miramiohi, Ohalenr, andOasp^ m 4fi The North Ooast of the Biver. Fh>m the B. St. John to Point de Monts, and from thence to Point Mille Vaohe ~ 56 The South Shore of the Biver. From Oape Ghtsp^ to the Id. of Bio 62 FromBicId. along the Southern Shore to St. Boque 66 From Point Mille Yache along the Northern Shore to Ooudres Island 71 Directions for sailing up the B. St. Lawrence from Anticosti to Quebec 79 Directions for Vessels bound down the Ghilf 92 w \ INDEX. 'ords are )t. Lk. e. ler. hange. -hos., ^40ft. ition. i! Alddes Bk 66 Amet Sound 80 Anohorages 87 Anne Harbour, St 17 Antioosti Id. 6 Antigonish Harbour 27 Apple Ida 67 Ariohat Harbour , 21 Azignole Bay 66 Bamabyld ■ 65 Barrett's Ledge 68 Basin Biver 66 Basque Id 67 Bayfield Ids 78 Bay Verte 82 Bathuxst Harbour 60 Bearings and Distances 2 Bedeque Harbour 40 Bersimis Ft. and Biver 61 Betohewun Harbour 12 Bio Id 66, 88 Bioquette Id. and Beef s 66 Birdlds 5 Bird Id. Lt 16 Black Bk.Pt 16 Bonaventure Id 58 Brandy Pots 69, 84 BiyonId 5 Buotouohe Boads 85 Oaoona 68 Canadian, or North Channel 8 Oanso, Oape and Cut of 21, 22, 24 Cape Breton Id 16 CapeOeorge 27 Cape North 28 Caraquette Harbour 50 Cardigan Bay 87 Caribou Harbour and Channel 29 CarletonBoad 62 Carlisle Pt 62 Ci^^oapediao Bj^ 62 '.'uD.'.'vupeque Harbour .' 44 Ca^'dld 68 Cerberus Bks 21 Chideur Bay 47 Charles Harbour 18 Chatham 47 Chatte, Cape 68 Chedabncto Bay 21 Clearwater Pt. » 18 CoaooachoBay 9 Cooagne Harbour 84 Ooudres Id 78 Crane Id 74 Currents at entrance of Onlf 2 Dalhousie Harbour 61 Daniel, Port 68 Despair, Cape 68 Douglastown 47 East Point 87 Eddy Pt. Light 22 Egmont, Cape 40 wrr- IV. INDEX. E-oumenaoPt !"|? Eaqoimanz Harbour 18 Father Point 64 Fiaherman'ii Bonk , 88 Fiiherman'a Ledge 40 Flat Id. Pt. Light 16 Flint Id 16 Gabarus Bay 20 Oasp^ Bay, Gape and Harbour 64 Oenevieve, St., Harboor 12 George Bay 26 Gooae Id 74 Green Id. Light 21 Green Id 67, 84 Grenyille Harbour 43 Gayaborongh Harboor 21 Habitants Harboor 22 Hare Id. and Bank 68, 69 Hillaboroogh Bay 89 Joorimain, Cape 88 Kamooraaka Ida 70, 86 Koochiboogoao Biver 86 La Braa d'Or , 17 Lark Pt. and Beef 71 Lobster Bay 68 Looisboorg Harboor 16, 19 Loup Biver 68 Madame Id 20 Magdalen Ids 8 Magpie Bay 66 Mai Bay 64 Maljpeqoe Harboor 48 Manioooagan Shoal 61 Manitoo Biver 66 Margaret, St., Bay 68 Matan Biver 63 Matis Great and Little Bays 81 Merigomish Harbour 27 Middle Channel (Biver St. Lawrence)... 76 Middle Shoal 69 Mille Vaohe Bay 62 Milne Bank 87 Mingan Channel and Harbour 15 Minganlds 11 MiraBay 19 Miramichi Bay 45 Miscou Id. and Harbour 48 Moisic Bay and Biver 56 Montreal 89 Murray Bay 72 Murray Harbour 88 Narrows 73 Natashquan Pt. and Harbour 10 Nelsontowu d7 Newcastle 47 Nipisighit Bay 60 North, Cape (Cape Bretou Id.) 23 North Channel (B. St. Lawrence) ...67, 77 North, or Canadian Channel 8 North Pt. (P. Edward Id.) ^Vl North Traverse 77 Northumberland Strait, Tides 41 Orleans Id 78 Panmore Hd. Light 87 Phillip Biver 82 Pictou Id. and Harboor 37 PUgrims 69 Point de Moots 69 Pokesoedie Shoal 49 PomqoetBoad 26 Port Hood 24 Prim Pt 88 Prince Edward Id 86 Pogwash Harboor 81 Quarantine 88 Quebec 79 Bazadelds 67 Bed Id 68, 84 Bichibocto Biver 86 Biohmond (Ohaleor Bay) 62 Bichmond Bay (P. Edward Id.) 48 BimouskyBoad 66 Bistigouohe Biver 61 Bosier, Cape 62 Sagnenay Biver 71 St. Anne, Cape 68 St. Anne Harboor 17 St. Anne Shoals 78 St. Genevieve Harboor 12 St. John Biver 66 St. Margaret Bay 68 St. Nicholas Harboor 60 St. Paul's Bay 78 St. Paul Id 1 St. Boque Shoals 74 Sawbill Biver 66 Scatari Id ., 16, 19 Sea Wolf Id 23 Seven Ids. and Bay 67 ShallopBivdr 66 ShediacBay 84 Ship Harboor 26 Shippigan Sound and Flat 49 South Channel (Biver St. Lawrence) 67, 78 Stapleton Pt. Lt 23 Sydney Harbour 18 Tatamagouohe Bay 31 Three Bivers 87 Tides 90 Tormentine, Cape 88 Tracadie Harbour 26 Traverse, The 77, 86 Trinity Bay 69 Vaehes Patch 71 Wallace Harbour 81 White Id 68 Whittle, Cape 9 Winds 3 FaRS .... 41 .... 77 41 78 87 82 . ... 27 69 69 49 26 24 88 86 81 88 79 67 ...68, 84 85 62 48 66 , 51 62 71 68 17 78 12 ... 65 .... 68 .... 60 .... 78 .... 1 .... 74 .... 56 .16, 19 28 57 66 84 26 49 ce) 67, 78 22 18 81 87 90 88 26 ...77, 86 59 71 81 68 9 8 SAILING DIEEOTIONS FOR THE !l GULF & RIVER ST. LAWRENCE. ni* VMrUtlon nMur St Paul'* Zatood la 26'> 40' W««t«rly.— 8. iid* of AntiooaU, 87*. — N. aidA of Prlno* Bdwaxd'a Island, 840. BotwMn tho 8«T«a Xdaada aad Cap* 8t. Ann, 8ei*. At Bio, 80*; and at Quoboo, 1B>. On tho N. BhOTM of tho GKOf, off Oapo Whlttio, 88> ; b o t w— u ■. nd of AntieoaU and Mowfbondland, 80*; and on fho V. aldo of Antloootl, 88* 80*. TlM Awtma^i inoTMtM of Yarlatlon 1* about 4' In tho BlTor St. Ziawranoo, 8' in tli9 Chdf, and dooroaalng a Uttlo on the Ooaat of ITowftoundlaad and Strait of BaUo lalo. MABINERS sailing from the British Channel for the Oulf of St. Lawrence usually endeavour to strike soundings on the Qreat Bank of Newfoundland, some- where in or about the lat. of 46° or 46" SC N., always taking care to go to the southward of the Virgin Bks. ; when, having passed the meridian of Oape Baoe, and reached the long, of 63°, a N.W. | W. course will carry them clear of St. Peter's Id., and across the centre of St. Peter's Bk., and directly to the N.E. Cape of the Id. of Breton. This N.E. Cape of Breton and Cape Bay, the S.W. point of Newfoundland, form the two points of entrance to the Gulf of St. Lawrence ; they lie E.N.E. f E. and W.S.W. fW., distant 64 miles from each other. Between them, and about 12 miles E.N.ES. from Cape North, is the Id. of St. Paul, appearing with three hills upon it, and deep water all round. Ships bound for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, after passing the Id. of Miquelon and St. Peter's, will do well by endeavouring to steer a mi£lle course between New- foundland and Cape Breton Id., passing on either side of St. Paul's Id. ; but by no means should they run beyond the parallel of 47° 30', until they are assuredly well past Cape Bay, for the harbours on the south coast of Newfoundland, to the westward of Fortime Id., are full of dangers, and but imperfectly known ; while the whole shore is frequently enveloped in thick fogs, and the rocks cannot then be perceived before getting entangled among them. In this part also shifts of wind are common ; and it will often happen that after blowing a gale from one point of the compass, it will suddenly vary to the opposite point, and continue equally strong ; thus it has been known that while one vessel has been lying-to with a heavy gale, another, not more than 90 miles distant, has been in another gale equally heavy, but with the wind in a direct contrary direction ; this has proved fatal to many ships. The winds within the gulf are not so liable to such sudden changes as on the outside or the eastward of Cape Breton Id. THE ISLAND of ST. PAUL is not dangerous, and may easily be recognised, even when the weather is foggy, by keeping a good look-out. There are now two excellent lights on this island. The shores of Cape Breton Id. are high, and although fogs do frequently obscure the land, yet by proper attention it will generally be discovered time enough to avoid danger. To persons who may un- fortunately be driven too near this coast, it may be serviceable to be apprised that a settlement is formed at Ashpee Bay, and good anchorage is to be nad behind the island, where boats can land and water and provisions be obtained ; while for the want of knowledge of such an establishment many have been obliged to endure both hunger and fatigue unrelieved. [St. Laweencob.] b •SUiii f«Ta » . 2 CURRENTS. — WINDS. Lights.— On the louthem point of St. Paul's Id., in lat. 47* 11' 20*, nnA long. 60' 9' 36', ii an octagonal Lt.-ho. of wood, exhibiting a rerolving light evorv minute, elovated 140 ft., and vis. 20 miles on all bonrings, except between S.S.Ei. southward to W. A bell is sounded during a fog ; and a gun fired every four hours, commencing at 4 a.m. On a rock, 20 ft. from the end of the island, in lafc. 47" 13' 60f, and long. 00° 8' 20', is another similar building of the same heidbt, bhowing a fixed light, vis. 20 miles, between N. by E. i E. northward to E.N^. Having entered the gulf, you will seldom fail to see tne Magdalen and Bird Ids. , and OS you must pass them in your route to the B. St. Lawrence, you had better, particularly in tmok weather, go either to the eastword and northward of these, Detween them and Newfoundiimd ; or to the southward and westward, between them and Prince Edward's Id., and not attempt to go between them in such weather. The weather to the southward of the Mag^dalens, and between them and Prince Edward's Id., is generally much clearer than to the northward; therefore the passage that way is to be preferred, particularly after the early part of the J rear, for then south-westerly wmds are most prevalent ; clear and good anchorage s to be had at the south-eastern pai-t of tne Mag^alens in Pleasant Bay, very near the shore ; this is a safe place for vessels to ride in, with westerly winds, and greatly more to be recommended than to hazard the beating about in the gulf with a foul wind ; the passage into it is safe. Bearings and Distances of the principal of Points and Places. BEARIirOS. MILES. From Oape Bay to the northern side of Bird Islands . . N.W. by W 74 „ „ eastern point of Anticosti N.N.W. | N 130 Gape North to the ^^.E. end of the Magdalen Ids. N.X.W. | W fi4 „ Bird islands N.4W 57 N.E. end of the Magdalen Ids. to the Bird Ids. . . N.E. by E. J E. . . 16 E. side of St.Paul'sId.to theE. side of theBirdlds. N.N.W. ^ X 66 North Bird Id. to the S.W. point of Anticosti . . N.N.W., northerly 134 ,, ,, Eastern point of Anticosti .... N. 9 E 78 Cape North to South Cape of Amherst Id N.W . by W 67 Southempointof Amherst Id. to northern point ) -nr v_ xr i xr oa of Prince Edward's Island ....) W. by N. * N 84 Bird Ids. to the eastern end of Byron Id W. f N 11 „ „ Cape Rosier N.W. |N 136 Cape Rosier to the S.W. point of Anticosti N.E. by E. ^ E. . . 38| „ „ Western end of Anticosti N. by E 61 In crossing the Ghilf of St. Lawrence even during the summer months, islands of ice have frequently been met with. The ice that drifts out of the river all disappears by the latter end of May, but these masses make no part of it. The conjecture is that they are not formed on any of tlie neighbouring coasts, but descend from the more northerly region of Davis's Strait, &o., where, it is presumed, they are severed by the violence of storms from the vast accumulation of the Arctic winter ; and passing near the coast of Labrador, are drawn by the indraught of the current into the Strait of Belle Isle. They are often 100 ft. in height, with a circumference of many thousands ; the temperature of the atmos- phere is very sensibly affected by them, which even in foggy weather, when they are not visible, sufficiently indicates their neighbourhood. By day, from the dazzling reflection of the sun's rays, as also by moonlight, their appearance is brilliant and agreeable. Currents at the entrance of the Oulf. — Captain Bayfield, R. N., says, " It is a general received opinion, that a current sets constantly to the south-eastward out of the Gulf of ^. Lawrence, between Newfoundland and Cape Breton Id. ; and also that it is frequently deflected to the southward, towards the shores of the island last named, by another current from the northward, which is said to enter the gulf by the Strait of Belle Isle. "I have myself observed that a current sets out between Cape Bay and St. Paul's Id. during westerly winds and in calm weather, but it is checked by easterly v THE MAODALEN ISLANDS. 8 L long. erory S.S.E. Tf our nlat. beight, I.NJB. rdldi., better, - [ tbeae, jetwcen [n luch kem and berefore t of the lohorage ay, yery nds, and the gulf jet. MHiBS. ... 74 ... 130 ... 64 ... 67 35... 10 .... 66 erly 134 .. 78 .. 67 .. 84 ,.. 11 ... 136 . . 38^ ... 61 hs, islands e river all >f it. The coasts, but here, it^ is 3umulation iwn by the a 100 ft. in the atmos- when they J from the ipearanoe is jays, It is ;h-eastward Jreton Id. ; he shores of sh is said to Bay and St. I by easterly winds ; and I boliovu it may sometimes run iu a contrary diroction from the same cause ; northerly winds, and perhaps also the above-named current from the northward, may cause the stream to set to the southward towards Oape Breton Id. : but the truth is that winds, both present and at a diatanco, possess so power- ful and irregular an action upon the sot and strength of the currents and tides, in the entrance of the gulf, that I can say nothing certain or definite respecting them. " The reality of a current inward, through the Strait of Belle Isle, is confirmed by the presence of icebergs. After entering the gulf it njns fdong the Labrador coast at the distance of 2 or 3 m. from the outer islands, leaving a narrow space in-shore, in which the streams of the tides, when uninfluenced by the winds, are tolerably regular. Passing outside Mistanoque, Grand Maoattina, and the South Maker's Ledge, it pursues a direction griiven to it by the trending of the coast, till it is turned gradually to the southwarcl by the weak current wmch is often found coming from the westward, between Anticosti and the north coast during westerly winds, and which is set off to the southward by Xata8h(|uan Pt. The united streams continue their course southward at a rate dimimshing as thoy become more widely spread, and which seldom exceeds ^ a knot ; and finally Joining the main downward current, out of the St. Lawrence, thoy all pursue a S.E. direction towards the main entrance of the gulf, between Cupe Kay and the Island of St. Paul. It is this current from the northward, whicu is felt by vessels crossing from off the Bird Ids. towards Anticosti, and which, together with the neglecting to allow for the local attraction of the compasses, has been the principal cause of masters of vessels so often findiug themselves, unexpectedly, on the south coast. Many shipwrecks have arisen from this cause near Oape Rosier, Oasp. — ^The east point is of low sand, with several sand-hills, which extend westerly to near the N.E. cape. A long spit of sand, with 2 or 3 fms. upon it, runs off S.E. ^ ^., 1^ m. from the point ; and the depth is only 4 to 6 fms. for 1^ m. further, in the same direction. To clear this spit in 5 or 6 fms., care must be taken not to bring Old Harry to bear to the soumward of west. The tides set rapidly over this spit, causing a heavy breaking sea. Coffin- Island.— Old Harry, the N.E. point of Coffin Id., is W.S.W., ^m, from East Pt. Coffin Island extends 4 miles westward from Old Harry. At the S.W. end of this island, between it and the sand-bars, is the entrance to Grand Ihitry Harbour ; it is only 50 fms. in breadth, and should not be attempted with- out a pilot. The depth at L.W. in the entrance is 10 ft., with 13 ft. at H.W. springs ; it is a well-sheltered and extensive harbour. AXBIOHT Island is S.W. of Coffin Id., and forms the east coast of the group, and the east shure of House Harbour. Cape Alright, the south point of the island, is a very remarkable headland, a mile inland ; it is 420 ft. above the level of the sea. To the N.W. of Cape Alright, about 2| m., is the entrance to House Harboiur ; it is narrow and crooked, witn only 6 ft. in it. Shag Island is W.S.W. \ W., 6 m. from the Grand Entry, and about 6 m. to the northward of Cape Alright, near to the shore. Entby Island bears S. ^ E., 7 m. from Cape Alright, and the channel into Pleasant Bay is between them, having passed between Alright Beef and Pearl Beef. Entry Id. is 680 ft. above the level of the sea, and may be seen 24 or 27 m. in dear weather ; its red cliffs rise at the N.E. point to 350 ft., and at the south point to 400 ft. The S.W. cliffs of Amherst are also steep, but of less height, and as there is no land to the southward and westward it cannot be mistaken. Shoals eastward of the Magdalens. — The principal dangers are the Doyle Beef, Columbine Shoals, Alright Beef, and Pearl Beef. The Doyle Beef is S.E. | E., 6| m. from East Point, and has only 3 fms. on it, with 12 or 13 fms. round it ; it consists of sharp rocks, and, as it seldom shows, it may be considered the worst danger on the east side of the Magdalens. The only mark foir this reef is the north cape of the Magdalens open to the north of the N.E. cape. . 2 s: t( •Si 0] oi si( b{ 8] &: he of i De ] It bre io: 1 Isle len^ T] it, ( 6 m. Grin if D Tl Wol Tl sand the I in tl of S(j Int] Li Lt.. visibi B] it is I 200 can I lie *of poin^ anchj ride Abl have r isalsJ these I Thl Iong,f part: destiti ISLAND OF ANTICOSTI. ehad there }Ours. ins, is rkablo xklor in the iuring off the > arbour BBS and before 7 ft. on I second ogether s of red t E.N.B. ag, with jontinue •osse Id., . ms. from theeast- Ig, which or 3 fms. to 6 fms. ms., care St. The W.,4im. . At the to Grand ted with- atH.W. he group, int of the the level to House ut 6 m. to annel into and Pearl 54 or 27 m. the south Height, and the Doyle fms. on it, lorn shows, lens. The he north of OoLXTHBiKE BooKB are a patch of rooks with only 3 fms. on them, S.S.W. ^ W., 2^ m. from Old Harry Head. Within them, towards Ooffin Id., are numerous small shoals and patches, on some of which are only 3 ft. This part ia {dangerous to approach at night in foggy weather. Albioht Beef is S. 80" E. from Cape Alright to the outer edge of the reef which is 400 fms. long by 300 wide ; it is conrposed of white-pointed rocks, having only 6 ft. over them. To dear it on the S. W. side, keep the well-marked summit of Ghrindstone Id. open to the S.-westward of Gape Alright, and to clear the S.E. side of the reef, keep the east side of the woods of Wolf Island (s6en over the bars) open to the eastward of Shag Id. Peabl Beep is a small dangerous reef of white-pointed rooks, havine only 8 ft. over it. It bears E. by N., 4^ m. from the N.E. part of Entry Id., and S»E. i S., 8^ m. from Gape Alright ; even with a moderate swell the sea breaks heavily upon it. Demoiselle Hill kept more than | a point open to the northward of Entry Id., will clear it to the northward. Shoals aitd Daggers on the west side of the Maodalens. — ^These are the Deadman's Islet, White Horse, Pierre de Qros Gap, and Wolf Bks. Deasmait's Islet is 7f m. N.W. | W. from the western part of Amherst Id. It is very remarkable, standing alone, and is about 3 cables in length and 1^ in breadth ; about 170 ft. above the sea, and has a reef extending from it nearly I of a mile towards Amherst Id. The White Hobse is a very dangerous reef, N. 60* E., 7 m. from Deadman's Islet, and 5 m. W.N.W. from Gull Islet ; it is small, being only about a cable's length in diameter; it has 10 ft. on it, on which the sea often breaks. The PlEBBE BE Guos Cap is another dangerous reef of rocks with 18 ft. on it, so that the sea breskks upon it in heavy weather; it lies N.E. byE. ^ E., 6 m. from the White Horse, and N.W. by W., 3| m. from the nearest part of Grindstone Id. A vessel will pass clear outside ox it, and also the White Horse, if Deadman's Islet be not brought to the westward of S.W. | W. The Wolf Book is a rocky shoal of 3 fms. , about ^ a mile from the shore, off Wolf Id., and 10 m. N.-eastward of Hospital Cape. The BIBD ISLANDS are small and not far apart; they are of coarse red sandstone, and moderately high, flat at the top, and have a white appearance ; the southern one is the largest; from the east end a small ridge of rocks runs out ; in the passage between them there is also a rocky ledge. The edge of the bank of soundings, on which are 55 fms., is 12 miles to the eastward of these islands. In thick weather come no nearer the east side than 40 fms. Light.— On the Great Bird Bk., in lat. 47° 50' 40' and long. 61° 8, 20', a white Lt.-ho. is erected, 50 ft. in height and 140 ft. above the sea, showing a fixed light, visible 21 m. Exhibited only during the season of navigation. BBYON ISLAND is about 4 m. long, in an E. by S. and 7^. by N. direction ; it is only a mile broad, and uninhabited ; the north side is 'i;he highest, about 200 ft. above the level of the sea : on the south side are some coves, where boats can easily land with off-shore winds. The S.W. end of the island is N.N.E. ^ E., 8| m. from the North Cape in the Mag^lens ; a reef runs off this end 1| m. The east end bears from the Bird Islands W. } N., 11m., and a reef runs off f of a mile to the N.E., There is also a reef to the southward, from the S.W. point of the island If m. Close to the eastward of this latter reef there is good anchorage in 4 or 5 fms., or in 6 fms. a mile from the shore. Small vessels often ride out heavy N.W. gales imder this island, close to the reef. About midway between the Bryon and Bird Ids. there is a rocky shoal, said to have only 4 fms. on it in one part, but no less than 7 have been found on it ; there is also a patch of 5 fms. 3^ m. W.S.W. from Bryon Id. In blowing weather both these patches should be avoided by large ships. The ISLAND of ANTICOSTI Ues nearly N.W. and S.E., being 123 miles long, and of irreg^ar breadth ; about the middle it is 30 miles wide, but its N.W. Sart is not above 9 or 10 miles broad. The island has been reported to be entirely estitute of either bays or harbours calculated to afford shelter for large shipping. f 6 SOUTH COAST OP ANTICOSTI. Its soil is unpropitious, and its aspect forbidding. The elevation is nowhere more than 700 ft. above the sea : the south coast is low and shelving, with reefs of flat limestone, which dry at L.W. ; the north coast for 70 or 80 m&s to the westward of East Pt. is bold, precipitous, and of considerable elevation, some of the cli£E'8 being 400 ft. high ; but the remainder of the north coast is low. The onl^ in- habitants on the island are the people in charge of theLt;-hos. and provision posts, and at Fox Bay. Anticosti divides the approach of the Biver St. Lawrence into two passages ; these are called the North and j^outh Channels ; the former is, at its narrowest part, 15 miles broad, and the latter 37| miles. Provision Post* have been established by the Government, for the relief ot the crews of vessels unfortunately wrecked upon the island ; for if wrecked at the close of the navigable season their crews would perish from want, and the severity of the climate. One of these provision posts is at Ellis Bay, 6 m. S.E. from the west end of the island ; the second at the Lt.-ho. on the S.W. point ; a third at Jupiter B., or Shallop Creek; a fourth at Heath Pt., and a fifth at Fox Bay, 12 miles northward of Heath Pt. Direction Boarda have been placed at different parts of the island, near the beach, in order to assist persons who may have the misfortune to be wrecked, in finding the provision posts above namea. The boards are nailed to trees with their branches cut off to render the writing visible. They are placed as follows : — 1st, on the west point of the island; 2nd, 12 m. S.-eastward of Ellis Bay; 3rd, 45 m. westward of Jupiter B. ; 4th, 21 m. eastward of Jupiter B. Beacons. — Four conspicuous beacons, painted white, have been placed on the south coast of Auticosti, the plans of which will be found on the chart of the Otdf of St. Lawrence. The easternmost is placed on the south poinii of the island, in lat. 49» 3' 43' and loiife. 62' 16' 0^ and is 40 ft. high ; the 2nd at Pavilion Bk., in lat. 49' 9' 46' and long. 62. 60, 0', also 40 ft. in height ; the 3rd stands 6 m. east of Salt Lake, in lat. 49° 17' 30', long. 63° 16' 0'; the 4th at Cape St. Mary, in lat. 49° 40' 30', and long. 63° 55' 0'. Lights. — There are three excellent lights on the Island of Anticosti. The S.W. point Lt.-ho. is buUt on the extremity of the point. The tower is of conical form, 76 ft. high. The light is bri^t, and revolves every minute, and can be seen from N.N.W. to about S.S.E. The lantern is elevated about 100 ft. above the sea at H.W., and can be seen 15 miles, from the deck. To the Lt.-ho. is attached a provision post, which forms a conspicuous landmark. Heath Point Lt.-ho. is of the same form, dimensions, and colour as that on the S.W. point of the island. It shows a bright fixed light from W.N.W. to N.E. by N. The lantern is elevated 110 ft. above the sea. This light is visible 15 or 18 m. in clear weather, lighted from April to the 15th December; the Lt.-ho. must always be kept open southward of Cormorant Pt. West Poiitt Lt.-ho. shows a fixed light, elevated 112 ft., and is visible 15 m. ; its position is lat. 49° 62' 5' and long. 64° 32' 0'. " The tower is circular, stone, faced with white fire brick. East Cafe is in lat. 49° 8' and long. 61° 40'. It is a perpendicular cliff, 100 ft. hidb. S.-westward of this, distant 3;; m., is Heath Pt. Between the two points is wreck Bay, affording no anchorage. It is H.W. at East Cape, F. and C. at 1 o'clock. Springs rise 6 ft., neaps 4 ft. SOUTH COAST OF ANTICOSTI.— Heath Point Beet. -This is a dangerous reef, running out 2 ni. in an E.S.E. direction t" ^ fms, all large stones ; 3 m. from the point are 7 fms. To avoid the foul gi i, come not nearer to the east side of the point than 20 fms. ; to the S.-west ,>urd of the point the shoal water only extends off f of a mile. A little farther to t>ie westward is one of the best open anchorages on this side of the island. An • lu 10 fms., with the Lt.-ho. E. by N., and Cormorant Pt. W.N.W., bottom sand and mud, and you will be nearly 2 miles from the shore. During westerly winds it would be dangerous to stand in too near the east side of Heath Pt., for the winds coming along the land on each side of the island, sometimes do not meet until several miles to the eastward of the point ; between ! >e more oi flat sstward le cliffs >nlyin- covisioii usageB ; iirowest relief oi recked at , and the J m. S.B. point; a b£ at Fox , near the recked.in trees with follows:— Bay; 3rd, iced on the lart of the »inv of the bhe 2nd at it ; the 3rd 4th at Cape osti. The , of conical and can he 00 ft. above le Lt.-ho. is tr as that on W.N.W.to jht is visible ' the Lt.-ho. isible 15 m- ". cular, stone, cliff, 100 ft. le two points F. and 0. at ri a dangerous 38; 3 m. from f to the east e shoal water le of the best bh the Lt.-ho. Id you will be „ the east side fof the island, Wt; between ELLIS BAT. 7 them you will be becalmed, and a strong current rourd the point might set yon upon the reef. Cormorant Pt. is W. J N., 6 miles from Heath Pt. ; and W. N.W. i N., 16j^m. farther, is the south point : the coast between is low. South Ft. Beef runs off to the southward 1^ m., on which the sea generally breaks. Heath Ft. Lt.-ho. and Cormorant Ft. in one, E. ^ S., clears this reef full 2 miles.. South Ft. is about 50 ft. high — a sandy clay ch£F. From South Ft. to the Lt.-ho. on the S.W. Ft., the distant is 66'm., and the land has much the same appearance all the way. In this space are the Jupiter Biver, or Shallop Creek, Favilion Biver, and Salt Lake Biver and Bay. Jupiter Biver is 13 m. N.W. of South Pt. The houses of the provision post are here. Pavilion Biver is 10 m. from Jupiter Biver ; the coast is all low, but may be approached safely by the deep-sea lead, the reefs extending nowhere more than a taile off. Salt-Lake Biver and Bay lie 21 m. north-westwara of Favilion Biver ; between which the coast is higher and bolder all the way to the S.W. Ft. than on any other part, and should, in dark, foggy weather, be approached with caution. When far enough to the westward, tack, at night, with the Lt. bearing N.N.W. Salt-Lake Bay has fine sandy beaches, enclosing lagoons, into which the tide flows. The S.W. Ft., on which the Lt.-ho. stands, is 11 m. north-westwc-rd of Salt- Lake Bay. It is a low projecting point of limestone, and has a cove on its north side, forming it into a small peninsula. A reef extends from the point J of a mile in a W. and S.W. direction ; boats can land on the south side of^the beaches, as weU as in the cove on the north side ; a vessel may anchor, in case of necessity, to the northward of the Lt.-ho,, in 12 or 13 fms., sand and gravel, the extremity of the point S.S.W. | W., f of a mile ; but this can be recommended as a ^oad- stead only with off-shore winds. Between the S.W. Pt. and Ellis Bay there is no safe anchorage ; and the reefs of flat limestone run off in most places a full mile, and have often 10 or 12 fms. close to them. Observation Biver is the largest stream on the island; its entrance is 5^ m. northward of the S.W. Ft., but it is mostly barred up with sand. There are some high sandy cliffs on the north side of this river. St. Mary's Cliffs lie 16 m. north- westward of Observation Biver ; they are of sand, and not so hi^ as the former. When in sight of the Lt., a vessel should tack when it bears S.S.E. Becscie Biver is a small stream at the head of a cove, affording shelter for boats. Its entrance is 7 m. north-westward of St. Mary's Cliffs. EiiLis Bay is the only good anchorage in the island ; it runs in between Cape Eagle and Cape Henry. A reef of flat limestone runs off a mile S. -westward from Cape Henry ; aina another reef runs off f of a mile to the westward from Cape Eagle ; the entrance between them is 600 fms., hota. 3 fms. on each side. Both the reefs show themselves by a line of breakers. In approaching this bey from the westward, run down along the reefs of Cape Henry in 10 fmR. until tlie west side of the White Cliff, which is on the east side of the bay, coi es on with the east side of the westernmost of two remarkable hills, back in the country, bearing N.E. | N., then haul up with these marks on, which will lead you into smooth water, close under Cape Henry Beef, in 3| fms. Continue running on until Gamache House bears N. by E., then haul up for it, and anchor in 3 fms., muddy bottom, about | a mile from the Flats at the head of the bay, and 300 fms. from those on either side. In approaching the bay from the eastward, with an easterly wind, keep along Cape Eagle Beef, in no less than 7 fms., till the east end of the White Cliff comes on with the east side of the same hill, as before ; then haul up till the houses bear N. by E., and proceed as before. It is H.W. at Cape Henry, F. and C, at Ih. 43m.; spring-tides rise 7 ft., neaps 4 ft. Ellis Bay may be readily known by Cape Henry, which is a bluff point, and the opening to the southward shows distinctly. West Point is low and wooded, the reefs do not extend above a mile from shore. Between West Ft. and Cape Henry the reefs run off 1| m. ; this part 8 NORTH, OB CANADIAN CHANNEL. should be approached with caution, by keeping the lead going. The light on West Point wul be a good g^ide to vessels in appvoaching these reefs. NORTH COAST OF ANTICOSTI.— From West Pt. to North Pt. the coast i« low, with reefs running off about a mile ; come no nearer than 26 fms. From North Pt. to High Cliff the distance is 13 nules ; it is low and wooded. High Cliff may be known by being the only one on the island that has not its base washed by the sea. White North Cliff may be seen 18 or 21 m. and is 26 miles S.-ea8tward of High Cliff; this part of the coast is dangerous ; for about ^ of the distance from High Cliff the reefs extend full 2 miles from the land, and continue so for some distance. On approaching White North Cliff they onlyreach about | a mile from the shore. Charlton Pt. is 10 m. south-eastwara of White North Cliff; under this point vessels may anchor in fine weather, and procure wood and water. Cape Observation is 10 m. south-eastward of Charlton Pt. ; this cape u a high, bold, remarkable headland. Bear Hd. is 12| m. south-eastward of Cape Obser- vation, between which are high greyish cliffs. Bear Hd. is similar to Cape Observation, being 400 ft. high ; they may easily be distinguished by the latter being the westernmost high land ; this pcurt is bold, havinp^ 100 fms. within 3 m. of the land. Bear Bay is the best anchorage on the north side of Anticosti ; it has a moderate depth, and good holding ground; it is situate between Bear Hd. and Cape Robert, 6 m. S.S.E. | E. from it. The best anchorage is in 13 fms., with Bear Hd. N. by W. | W., and Cape Robert S.E. by S. Table Hd. is 19 m. south-eastward of Cape Robert; the coast is broken into small bays, which afford no anchorage. Table Hd. is remarkable by the hill from which it derives its name, that rises immediately from the summit of the cliffs. Fox Pt. is 4 m. further to the S.E., and is much lower than Table Hd. Fox Bay is less than 2 m. southward of the point, and a mile wide, and deep ; there is a house and store at the N.W. part of the bay, and a stream and lake at its head. Reef Pt. is the southern point of Fox Bay, from which a reef runs out 1^ m., having only a few feet over it, with 10 fms. close to it. Between Fox Bay and East Cape, the limestone cliffs are 100 ft. high, bold, and free from danger. You may anchor at the distance of a mile from the shore, between Cape Sandtop, and East Cape, in 16 to 20 fms., find sand. The island has hitherto been conaidered dangerous to vessels bound to Quebec ; but with care it will not be found so, for so soon as the land can be seen, you may advance towards, and sail freely along it ; by which you will always get faster to the westward with foul winds, than you can do in the offing. There can be no danger of getting embayed, and the flood tide is regular near the island. Mr. Lambley, in a fast-sailing schooner, frequently laid-to during the night with westerly winds, and always found himself to windward of the place in the morning. The NORTH, or CANADIAN CHANNEL, is' bo-nded on the southward by the Id. of Auticosti, and on the northward by the mainland ; here, in about the long, of 64° 20', is the R. of St. John; the coast to the eastward of which, together with the adjacent islands, including Anticosti, is under the Government of New- foundland ; to the westward of that river is under the Government of Quebec. To the eastward of St. John's R. are the Mingan Ids. ; these are a numerous cluster of islands off the main, with passages between, and places of good anchorage ; the westernmost is named Mingan Id., and bears from the western point of Anticosti N.E. by E. f E., distant 2d| mUes ; the Mingan settlements are to the E.N.-eastward of the island, distant about 7 or 8 miles. The 'harbour is formed between Harbour Id. and the main ; here vessels may ride securely in all weathers; the ground is good, and the anchorage in from 5 to 10 fms., with plenty of cod-fish, salmon, and seals. The soil surrounding the settlement is fertile and the land level. V 9 THE NORTH COAST. FBOM CAPE WHITTLE TO THE R, ST. JOHN, INCLUDING THE MINGAN ISLANDS. From Oape Whittle, the western point of Lake Id., the coast runs W.N.W. i N., nearly 63 miles. From the oai>e to EegasMca B. the coast is of granite, which rises into steep hills and ridges, which are seldom higher than 200 ft. ; this part of the coast is studded with innumerable rooks, islets, and small islands, some of which are 6 miles from the mainland ; these islands, as well as the main, are bare of wood. From Eegashka to Natashquan Ft., a distance of 16 miles, the oU£b are all sandy, covered with spruce trees, nnd fronted by fine sandy beaches. It is H.W., F. and 0., on this part of tho coast at lOh. 45m.; springs rise 6 ft., neaps 3 ft. This coast, when seen from a distance, is aU so much alike that it is almost impossible to distinguish one part from another ; it is only when you approach within 3 or 4 miles of the outer rocks, its broken, dangerous nature becomes apparent. The outer rocks off this part of the coast are so bold that there is no warning by the hand-lead, but there are soundings with the deep-sea lead in moderate out irregular depths off every part of the coast ; these, with the assistance of the chart, and due attention, are sufficient to warn a vessel of her approach toward danger at night, or in foggy weather. Whittlz; Books. — These are a number of rocks, above and under water, south- westward of the oape, the outermost of which are half-tide rocks, and are about 2'| miles from the cape. Wolf Id. is N.W. by W. i W., 6| miles from Oape Whittle ; it may be readUy known by being larger and higher than the other islands in its vicinity, IfiO ft. high, and making in two hills. Wolf Bay is between the island and the oape ; it runt> In 6 or 7 mues, and has sufficient water in it ; but a number of rocks and ledges extend across its mouth, rendering the approaches to it very dangerous. The Outer Islet is small, and is a mile S.W. of Wolf Id. Grange Book. — ^A dangerous isolated sunken rock has been discovered 1^ Mr. W. Grange, in the steamer "North America," upon which she struck. It appears to lie about 3 miles S.S.W. | W. from the Outer Wolf Islet, and has 16 ft. upon it. CoAOOAOHO Bat is to the westward of Wolf Id. ; it is the only place affording anchorage for large vessels upon this part of the coast, and is not at all difficult of entrance, although the number of islets and rocks in every direction make it appear so. There is an excellent harbour at the head of the bay, called the Basin, and another formed by an arm nmning into the bay E. by N., named Tertiary Shell Bay, which is equally safe ; farther out than these harbours the bay is more than I a inile wide, and quite sufficiently sheltered from the sea, for the safety of any vessel with good anchors and cables. The entrance is formed by Outer Islet and Wolf Id. to the eastward, and by the Audubon Ids. and Bks. to the north-westward. There are three small dangerous ledges outside of the entrance, which must be carefully avoided ; the first is the S. Breaker, with only 1 2 ft. over it, and only shows in heavy weather ; it bears W.N.W. J W., 2 miles from the Outer Islet, having a clear channel between them; the second a shoal of 18 ft., f of a mile S.W. by W. from the S. Breaker; the third is the S.W. Breaker, with only 3 ft. over it, and bears N.W. by N., SJ miles from the S. Breaker ; the channel between them is clear and deep. To enter this bay &om the south-eastward, steer so as to clear the Ghrange Bk., and leave the Outdr Islet and its rocks about 300 fms. to the eastward. When abreast of these rocks you will see, right ahead, a chain of low rocks running [G. & B. St. LAwniafOE.] o mm 10 NATASHQUAN POINT. S.W. from Emery Id. ; bring the point of these rooks to bear N.E. f N., when it -will appear on with the extreme point of the mainland on the N.W, side of the bay ; continue running on this mark, leaving several rocks 600 fms. from the eastern side of Audubon, on yom- port hand, and passing them, haul to the north- ward a little, so as to leave the Emery Bks. on the starboard ; their outer points lie X.N.E. i E., 3 miles from the Outer Islet; when up to them, the bay is open before you, and clear of danger ; the farther you go in the better the ground, and less sea with S.W. winds. If you run into Tertiary Shtll Bay there is nothing in the way excepting a^ small rock, above water, ^ of a mile within the entrance, which must be left on your starboard hand ; it is quite bold ; within you will lie land-locked, in 5 to 11 fms. mud. At ^ a mile within the entrance it is only 120 fms. wide, but it is wider farther in. When running for the basin, keep the N.W. shore on board, leaving Tertiary Shell Bay, and rocks north of it, to the eastward, iintil within | a mile of the island at the head of the bay ; then steer over to the eastward, towards the island, to avoid a shoal of boulder stones, extending 200 fms. from the west side of the bay, with a deep channel between it and the island 100 fms. wide; leave the island about 00 fms. to the eastward, and as you pass through, you will deepen your water from 9 to 19 fms. ; as soon as past the inner end of the island, haul to the N.W., in the mouth of a smaJl bay, and anchor in 8 fms., mud. On the east side of the entrfince of the river there is a house occupied by the fur traders. Olomanosheebo Biver is 12 miles westward of Coacoacho ; this is a considerable river, falling 20 ft., over granite, into the head of a bay 4 miles deep^ ; it is so sh^ow that boats can hardly enter at L.W. ; the coast is studded with innumer- able islands. Near the falls, on the. east side, is a trading post. Tbkbli! Islet aitd Loon Book. — ^These rocks lie off the entrance to the above river ; the latter, 6 miles to the westward, can always be seen, and is 3 miles from the mainland. Wash-scheoootai Bay is 10 miles to the westward of Olomanosheebo, is 2^ m. wide, and has off its entrance several small rocky ledges, which make its entrance very difficult. Up this river, on the east side, there is one of the Hudson Bay Oompany's trading posts. About 4| m. farther westward is the entrance to Musquarro Biver, where there is another of the Hudson Bay Company's trading and fishing posts ; the entrance is intricate and dangerous, and only fit for boats ; it may be known by some houses on the east side of the entrance. Curlew Ft. is about 5 miles westward of the Musquarro Biver, and is in the east point of Kegashka Bay. Eegashka Bay is between Curlew and Kegashka Ft., it is 3 m. wide, and 1| m. deep. This is a wild place, the small islets being too far apart to afford any shelter. It is only in the N.W. comer of the bay, behind Eegashka Ffc., that a vessel can be sheltered from southerly winds ; there is f oom there for several small schooners, which may shelter themselves during the summer months. Wood and water may be had on the western part of the bay. Eegasl&a Bay has this advantage : there are no ledges or other dangers off its entrance. At 3 m. to the westward of this bay is the Eegashka Eiver, having falls 40 ft. high : but they cannot be seen from the sea ; here is another fishing station of the Hudson Bay Company ; it only affords shelter for boats. About a mile S.W. from the west point of entrance there is a ahoal of 2^ fms. At 2| m. farther westward fine sandy beaches, in front of sand-hills, covered with spruce trees, commence, and continue to Natashquan Ft., a distance of 15 m. NATASHQUAir POINT.— This remarkable sandy point is the southernmost point on the north side of the gulf, eastward of the Seven Ids, and bears from the east point of Anticosti N.N.E. j E., distant 67 m. About 1| m. from the mouth of Long Biver, and 11 m. eastward of Natashquan Ft., there is a shoal, on which the sea breaks ; by not going nearer the shore than 17 fms. you will avoid it. At 1 J m. S.W. from Natashquan Ft., there is a small cod bank of 4^ fms. ; and between MusquaiTO and Natashquan, at from 6 to 11 m. from the ii ! MINGAN ISLANDS. 11 wli«n it e of tbe rom the e north- Qt points f is open md, and lepting a^ je left on (d, in 6 to , but it is f Tertiary tile of the he island, ide of the the island epen your iai:d to the e east side s. ►nsiderable jp ; it is so 1 innumer- 3 the above miles from )0, is 2^ m. .ts entrance [udson Bay sntrance to y's trading 'or boats ; iirlew Pt. is at point of and If m. afford any Pt., that a 3veral small Wood and igers off its iver, having ther fishing About a At 2J m. with spruce juthemmost bears from m. from the ;e is a shoal, ms. you will jod Dank of m. from the land, are several banks of sand, gravel, and shells, of 24 to 40 fms., having upwards of 50 fms. between them and the land. Abundance of cod fish are caught on these banks by the American fishing schooners. Natashquak Bivek, the mouth of which is about a mile wide, enters the sea between two saudy points, about 3 m. N. -westward from the south extremity of the point ; in the middle of the entrance 'is a low sandy island, havinga narrow channel on each side of it ; in the southern are from 9 to 11 ft. at H.W. Small schooners enter and lie where the Hudson Bay Company's houses, are, on the south side within the entrance. It discharges a great body of water in the spring of the year, and makes the surface of the sea fresh for several miles around. Immense quantities of cod fish are caught here in the early part of the spring. Little Natashquan Haeboxte, 3^ m. N.N.E. i E. from the river, is form^b^ numerous rocks and islets, and only fit for small schooners under 100 tons. It is a convenient place for the fishing vessels, and is resorted to principally by the Americans; its entrances are between reefs only 90 fms. wide, and a pilot is necessary for those unacquainted. There are thousands of rocks and small granite islands along this coast, and many anchorages like this, which no chart could show the way into. With a clear sky and a smooth sea, when the bottom can be seen in 3 fms., with a handy, quick-working vessel, and a bright look-out, you may find your way to such places, the existence of which is always shown by crosses, or piles of stone, or drift-wood upon the islets ; these are placed as guides for the fishermen. It is H.W. off this harbour at 11 h. Spring-tides rise 6 ft., neaps 3 ft. The coast between Natashquan Pt. and St. Genevieve is low near the sea, rising a short distance back into mounds and ridges, nowhere exceeding 400 ft. in height. There is a sandy tract of coast between Agwanus and Xabesippi Biver ; the sandy tracts are always thickly wooded with spruce trees. There are numerous coves and small bays for boats. The small bare islets are innumerable, but they do not extend above 2 m. from the mainland, and should not be approached within 20 fms. The current along this shore from the westward seldom exceeds i a knot. Between Natashquan and Genevieve there is no safe harbour for shipping ; but there are several rivers and small bayis (as shown on the chart), where boats, and even small schooners, might find shelter occasionally. The Hudson Bay Company have also two or three settlements on this part of the coast. The MINOAN ISLANDS are a long chain of islands running nearly parallel with the coast, between long. 03° 0' and 64° 13'. The general character of these islands is low, nowhere exceeding 300 ft. in height. They possess very little soil, yet are thickly wooded on the side towards the mainland ; but towards the sea, barren tracts often occur. There are 29 islands in all, none of which are inhabited. Wood and water may be obtained at all the principal islands. Mount St. John, which ;s 1416 ft. high, is the highest part of the mainland in this neighbourhood, and northward of the westernmost Mingan Ids. There are other hiBs farther eastward, about 1000 ft. in height ; these are opposite Quarry Id. : farther eastward the mainland i^ low. The tides among these islands seldom exceed a knot, except in very narrow channels. St. Genevieve Id. is the easternmost of the Mingan Ids., and is about 5 m. in cir- cumference ; the K.E. point is bluff, and about 200 ft. high. Mount St. Genevieve is on the main, about 2| m. northward of the island; it is about 800 ft. in height. In approaching this island there are two patches of rocks to be avoided, called the Saints and Bowen Eks. The Saints are two low bare rocks, ^ a mile to the southward of the islands, having a channel of 5 fms. , foul groimd, between. The Bowen Bks. are 4 of a mile apart : the N.W. Bowen has only 3 ft. on it, and E.S.E. ^ E., distant 1,| m. from the eastern Saint ; the S.E. Bowen has 6 ft. over it, and } of a mile S.E. | S. from the N.W. Bowen. The soundings near these rocks are very irregula]^— from 6 fms., rook, to 43 fms., sand, sometimes in a single cast of the lead. These dangers are 2 m. from the islands, and should be carefully avoided. 12 BETOHEWUN HABBOUB. Oollins Shoal is a Bmall patch of rooks, having 16 ft. over them ; 2| m. south from the S.E. pohit of Hunting Id. The marks on this dangerous shoal are, the east point of »t. Qeneyieve just open to the eastward of the western Baints N. 38* E., and the north point of Wood Id. on with the south side of the Oarde Bk., bearing N.W. Huntinff id. is the next westward of St. . Oenevieve ; it is bordered with rocks on all si^s, low, and thickly wooded, about 4 m. in length, and 2 in breadth. The Garde Bk. is about a mile to the southward of the centre of the island, havin;; no sKfe passage between ; the S.E. point of the island is likewise beset with reefs, nearly f of a mile o£F. Off the S.W. point is Wood Id. and Chin Id. ; they are both low, and have reefs ilmninff off ^ of a mile to the southward of them ; these reefs are nearly 2 m. from the island, and have no safe passages between them. ST. OENEYIEYE HABBOUB is to the northward of the island, between it and the main. It may be safely entered either by the Eastern, or Saints' Channel} and is fit for the largest ships. To ENT£B BT THE Eastebn CHAimEt. — In Order to dear the Bower Bks., when at least 3 m. from the island, bring the N.E. bluff point of St. Oenevieve in one with Indian Pt. which is a woody low point on the main, forming the east point of Pillage BAy, bearing N.W. by N. ; continue on with these marks, leavmg the Bower Bks. | a mile to the westward ; and when the S.E. part of St. Genevieve comes on with the West Saint, change coiirse a little to the northward, to clear a flat shoal, which extends about 600 yards from the east side of the island. Qive the N.E. point of the island a berth of a cable's length passing close to the shingly north pomt of the island, and bring up, in 10 rais., muddy bottom, l^hlf-way between the point and Anchor Id. To enter by the Saints' Ohannel, when at least 5 m. from St G«nevieye Id., bring the west points of St. Genevieve and Anchor Ids. in one, bearing north ; with this leading-mark run in, until the north side of the two Saints come in one, bearing E.S.E. i E. ; at the same time the east sides of Mount Partridge and Hunting Id. come in one, bearing N W. by N. ; steer in upon this last leading- mark, to avoid the reef, which runs 280 fms. from the S.W. point of St. Genevieve, until the east side of Mount Genevieve, seen over the sandy S.E. point of Anchor Id., comes in one with the N.W. point of St. Genevieve bearing N.N.E. | E. ; now alter course to north, which will lead through the centre of the channel between the Hunting and St. Genevieve Ids. ; then proceed round Anchor Id. (giving its west end a berth of 2 cables' length), to the anchorage at St. Genevieve. BETCHEWTTN HABBOUB is to the westward of St. Genevieve, and between Htinting Id. and Partridge Pt. If bound through the Saints' Channel, the former directions given for it will lead in between St. Genevieve and Hunting Id., which is quite bom up to the anchorage. In entering this harbour from the eastward, instead of anchoring at St. Genevieve, pass on to the northward of Anchor Id., which is quite bold on that side ; you will then see the entrance of Betchewun bearing W. hj X., between the north point of Hunting Id. and Partridge Pt. ; Mount Partnd^, to the N.E. of the i8land,*wUl be easily recognised, being a wooded steep- sided hill. Pass close to Hunting Id. to avoid a shoal that runs | of a nule from Partridge Pt. to the southward, diminishing the entrance to 250 fms. ; when within it, steer for a low islet in the middle of the harbour, bearing W. by N., and anchor | of a mile from it. Within St. Genevieve and Himting Ids. there is scarcely any sea, and the whole may be considered a harbour capable of affording shelter for a great number of large ships. Water may be obtained either from the main or uie islands ; and wood may be had on the main. The tides here are very weak, and seldom amount to one knot. Ghahles l8i« is next to the westward of Hunting Id. ; its S.E. point bears N.W. by W., about 24 m. from Chm Id.; is about 3 m. long, and l^m. wide, bold, and free from shoals ; its elevation is about 200 ft. PufBn's Bay is the space between Hunting and Charles Ids. ESQUIMAUX HABBOUB, 18 hem ; 2| m. souih rous shoal axe, the he western Saints I side at the Qarde ordered with rooks , and 2 in breadth, the island, hayinc se beset with reefis, Ghin Id. ; they are urd of them ; these s between them. i island, between it or Baintd' Ohanneli e Bower Eks., when it. Genevieve in one ng the east ^int of marks, leavmg the wt of St. Genevieve orthward, to clear a of the island. Give ; dose to the shingly y bottom, h^f-way n. St Genevieve Id., one, bearing north ; I Saints come in one, cunt Partridge and >n this last leading- int of St. Genevieve, .E. point of Anchor N.KE.iE.; now |{he channel between ichor Id. (giving its Genevieve, levieve, and between Channel, the f onner Hunting Id., which from the eastward, -ard of Anchor Id., irance of Betchewun and Partridee Pt. ; recognised, being a I shoal that runs \ of tntranoe to 250 fms. ; harbour, bearing ly sea, and the whole Ir a great number of ' or uie islands ; and and seldom amount its S.E. point bears ig, and Hm. wide, a's Bay is the space OHARLES HABBOUB is between the mainland and the island, and though narrow, it is vetir secure ; the entrances are only 80 fms. wide ; within the harbour is anchorage in from 4 to 6^ fms., mud. To enter the harbour from tbe eastward, bring the N.E. end of Ohbrles Id., which is high and olifify, to bear N.W. ; then steer for it, giving it a berth of 100 to 180 fms., as you round it to the westward into the harbour. To enter the harbour from the westward by Trilobite Bajr, g^ive the N.W. point of Charles Id. a berth of 60 to 140 fms., as you haul round it to the S.E. by E. into the harbour. The tidus, with strona winds, will sometimec run 2 knots in the entraaoes to the harbour, but in the streams they are only weak. Whale Island is on the western side of Trilobite Bay ; it is bold-to, and has excellent anchorage to the eastward, sheltered from all but southerly winds ; the only danger to be avoided in working into Trilobite Bay is a reef off Ammonite Ft., which includes a small islet, and extends ^ a mile off shore. CLEABWATEB POIXT is 2^ miles to the westward of Whale Id., and about 2 miles from Ammonite Pt. ; it is low, but the shoal water off it only extends about i of a mile to the southward. This point projecting so far to the south- ward, divides the range of the Mingan Ids. into two parts. A rocky shoal of 3 fms. lies westward, 1^ mile from the point ; and there are three other shoals, of 2 to 3 fms., to the northward of the former, nearly midway between Sea Cow Id., southern end, and Clearwater Pt., the westernmost rode being 2 miles from the point. To pass outside, or to the southward of these shoals, keep the southern point of Gull and Freight Ids. in one, bearing N.W. by W. ; this clears them full ^ a mile. Sea Cow Id. is 3| miles W.N.W. of Clearwater Ft., having a good channel bntween it and the Clearwater Bks. ; to the westward of Sea Cow Id. is Walrus and Green Ids. ; these latter islands are small, but there is a clear passage between them, called Walrus Channel. Gxdl Id. is a nule W. i S. from Green Id. ; both the latter are covered with grass ; but it is only ^ a mile S.W. from the S.E. point of Esquimaux Id., having no passage between. The southern end of Gull Id. is bold-to within 2 cables' length. Esquimaux Islaio) is 2{ miles long, and If mile wide, about 200 or 250 ft. in height on the noithem side. From its S.W. point a shoal runs out towards Fright Id., which also has a shoal off it, stretching towards the latter, 'narrowing the channel leading to Esquimaux Harbour to about 3| cables' lenfj,' '■. Fright Id. is about a mile westward of Esquimaux, aud is about f of a mile long; it has reefs running off from both the N.W. and N.E. points 3 cables' lengtl '. you m{^ pass within 100 fms. of its S.W. point. Quin Id. is ^ a mile N.E. by N. from Fnght Id. ; it is larger than the latter island, is bold all round, ex:oe-)t its N.W. point, off which a reef nms to the westward | a mile. Quin Channel is between the northern end of the island and Port aux Morts on the main, in which are 5 to 7| fms. ; this is the best channel from the westward towards the Esquimaux Harbour; the reefs do not extend more than 2 cables' length from the main, and about a cable's lengt h fro m the northern end of the island. ESQUIMATJX HABBOIJB.— This excellent harbour it situate between the northern side of the Esquimaux Id. and the main ; the island is about 4 cables' length from Esquimaux Pt., which forms the N.E. poirt of the harbour. To enter the harbour with easterly winds, the best passage is through the Walrus Channel, keeping midway between Walrus and Green Ids. When you are a few miles to the southward of Walrus Id., endeavour to bring the N.E. point of Esquimaux Id. to appear midway between the two Ids., bearing about north; then steer for it, giving it a berth of about a cable's length ; haul round it to the north-westward into the harbour, and anchor in 5 to 10 fms., sandy bottom. To enter the harbour from the westward, the best passage is throud|i the Niapisca Channel, leaving the island of that name to the westward, and Fright and Quin Ids. to the eastward. To clear the southern reef of Niapisca 2 cables' lengih, the mark is the N.W. point of Fright Id. in one with the southern end of Quin Id. ; you must not, therefore, open these islands dear of each other, until 14 LARGE ISLAND. I I the Moniao Id., nAar the main, 21 miles N. | E. of Xiapisca, is in sisht to the eastward of the latter island ; then haul throuffh the channel, steering N.N.E. | E., until Montange Id., which is next west of Moniao, is open to the northward of Niapisoa ; you will then be clear of the reefs on the eastern side of the island ; you must now haul a little more to the north-westward, if necessary, to clear the reef running off W.N.W. from the northern point of Quin Id., until you open Sea Cow Id. to the northward of Esquimaux Id., then run in between the Quin and Point aux Morts, with the last-named marks just open, bearing S.E. } E., passing about 2 cables' length north of Quin Id. ; continue your course towards the north point of Esquimaux Id., and haul ro\md it to the southward into the harbour. Observe that the marks to clear the shoals and islets westward of Point aux Morts, are the N. and N.E. points of Esquimaux in one, bearing S.E. | E. ; if you open these marks before you are abreast of Quin you will be ashore. Good water may be had from the river near the Esquimaux Pt., as well as from the streams on the island. The tides running through Esquimaux Harbour seldom exceed a knot ; the flood setting in from the eastward, and the ebb tht contrary. Quarry Island is about 3^ cables' length to the westward of Xiapisca Id., having no safe passage between ; it is about 2^ miles in length, and 200 ft. in height. Some reefs run off from the southern side of the island nearly | a mile. Quarry Cove is on the northern side of the island, about ^ from the eastern end. This is a snug little land-looked harbour ; when entering, keep nearest the western side, and anchor near the middle, in 9 or 10 fms. This cove runs in about 4 cables' length; and you may obtain good water from a small stream in the S.W. comer. Labgk Island is 400 fms. to the westward of Quarry Id., having a clear navi- gable channel of about 3| cables' length between them. This island is 11 miles in circumference, thickly wooded, and the highest part about 200 ft. above the sea. Beefs run off from the S. and S.W. points nearly } of a mile. The Middle Beef, a part of which is always above water, is surrounded by a shoal ^ a mile long, in a N.E. by N. direction, and ^ of a mile wide, and is a mile south-eastward of Outer Birch Id. The part above water is not above 30 fms. in diameter. Large Channel, between Middle Beef and Large Id., is If mile wide, having 40 to 50 fms. in the middle. This is the best channel when bound to Mingan Harbour with an easterly wind ; the only thing to be guarded against is the reefs that extend 2 or 3 cables' length off the western shore of Large Id., as far in as the Flower Pot Columns ; the island then becomes bold. The Middle Beef may be approached to 13 fms.; when farther in, the Birch Id. forms the western side of the channel. Middle Beef Channel, between the Outer Birch Id. and Middle Beef, is a mile wide, with deep water in it ; the shoals, off the southern point of the Outer Birch, only reach off about 1^ cable's length. The Birch Islands are 2 miles to the westward of the northern end of Large Id., and are named the Outer and Inner Birch Ids. ; the latter is the largest of the two. The channel between the islands is about 3 cables' length in width, all foul ground, and not recommended ; these Ids. are 300 ft. high. The Outer Birch Id. has a reef running off its western side full | a mile. Off the N.W. point of the Inner Birch Id., which is low, an extensive reef runs off nearly a mile ; about ^ a mile S.W. of this point is a remarkable rock, called the Hulk Bk., resembling the hidl of a wrecked vessel ; the reef runs south-westward about 3 cables' length from the rock. Mingan Island, 3^ miles westward of Inner Birch Id., is 2 miles long, in a N.N.E. direction, and nearly a mile broad ; bare of trees, and about 100 ft. in height ; the eastern side is bold ; but the reefs run off from the S.W. point 600 fms., and from the southern point 300 fms. Mingan Patch. — This is a rocky patch of 9 fms., on which there is a heavy swell at times ; it lies 3^ miles S.W. i S. from the southern point of Mingtua Id., and with the southern point of the Outer Birch on with the northern point of Large Id. MINOAN HARBOUR. 16 The Porroquetfl are four small islets, low and bare of trees; these are the western- most of the Minsan group. The easternmost is 2 miles N.W. by W. from the centre of Minsan Id. ; a reef nms out S.S.W. from them ] of a mile ; and another reef, from their northern end, runs off i of a mile. The north-westernmost islet ia the hishest, and has shoal water off it, both to the eastward and westward, full :^ of a mue ; you may go to the northward of it within 2 oables' length, in 14 or id fms. The Perroquet Channel is 1^ mile wide, with deep water in the middle. Both flood and ebb set out through it; the flood sets to the S.W., and the ebb to the southward. The MINGAN CHANNEL, between the islands and the mainland, is safe throughout ; all the islands are bold, and free from danger on their northern MINOAN HAHBOUB is between Harbour Id. (whioh is N.N.E. of Birch Ids.) and the mainland, whioh latter is low and has a fine sandy beaoh ; but the Id. is about 100 ft. in heisht, and bold towards the harbour ; on the southern side it is shelving, and shoal ^ of a mile from shore. The length of the island is about 2 miles, its breadth about | a mile ; it is thickly wooded, and has a reef off both the eastern and western ends to the distance of 240 fms. The harbour is narrow and well sheltered ; the anchorage within^ it is about a mile long, and 270 fms. wide, with plenty of water for the largest ships ; bottom fine sand. Northward of the eastern end of the island is the mouth of Mingan B., off which there is a shoid extending 700 fms. out from the entrance; this shoal dries at L.W., and shelters the han)our from easterly winds. This harbour, like Esquimaux Harbour, has the advantage that vessels can enter or leave it with either easterly or westerly winds. The western entrance is 170 fms. wide, and the eastern entrance, between the above sandy shoal and the inland, 200 fms. To enter the harbour from the eastward, bring the northern or inner side of the harbour to bear N.W. ; the houses of the Hudson Bay Company ought to appear then full their own breadth open to the northward of the island ; keep the houses thus open and steer for them, leaving the eastern end of the island 150 fms. on your port hand, or southward of you ; taking care to keep the southern side of the sandy point of the main, which forms the western entrance of the harbour, shut in behmd the northern side of the island ; for when they are in one you will bo asround on the sandy shoal off Mingan R. ; when past the eastern end of the island, run along its northern side, at the distance of a cable's length, and anchor near the centre of the harbour, in 9 to 13 fms. When coming in by the western entrance, run in towards the sandy beaoh of the I mainland, at the distance of 4 of a mile to the westward of the island, imtil the 1 sandy point of the main, which forms the western end of the harbour, comes in lone with the face of the clay cliffs, to the eastward of the Company's houses, bear- nng E. by S., or into 11 fms.; with this mark on, run in along the beach, giving Ithe above sandy point a berth of | a cable in passing ; then choose your anchoring }erth as before. H.W. at Mingan Harbour at 1 h. 10 m. Springs rise 6 ft., leaps 4. Montange Island is on the north side of Mingan Channel, opposite to Quarry td. ; and 1| m. farther eastward is Moniac Id. These islands are | of a mile from the shore, having numerous islets between them ; the shoals between the islands, |11 the way to the main, dry at L.W. ; but they only extend about 3 cables' length the southward of the islands, with irregular soundings of 4 to 8 fms. a mile off; lorefore, when beating through, keep within Ij m. of the north side of the outer [ilands, standing no farther northward than 10 fms. Long Point is 6 m. to the westward of Harbour Id., between which there are lo dangers. From Long Pt. a broad beach of fine sand extends to the Biver It. John, a distance of 7 m. ; without this beach, shoal water extends off all the fay for full f of a mile. 16 CAPE BRETON ISLAND (EAST COAST). FBOM CAPE NORTH TO THE OUT OP OANSO. This part of the ooatt ia oommonly made by Tossels from Europe, when bound tbrouffh the Gut of Canao, or to porta in Mora Bootia. The anorea appear to aome aiatance up the country, barren and rook^; the topa of the hilla beins much alike, and having nothing remarkable to diatinguiah them. The new £t.-hoa. however, on thia coaat, may aerve to point out the aeveral parta of the ialand on which they stand. Light*.— SoATABi IsXiAin) N.E. point, on Trap Bk., in lat. 40* 2' 13', and long. 69° 40' 18', a Lt.-ho. painted white; thia exhibita a revolving Lt., 00 ft. high, visible 1 minute and invisible ^ a minute at the distance of 15 m. The Lt. should never be brought to bear to the eastward of N.N.E., or to the southward of S.S.W., nor approached nearer than 1| m. Gun fired as signal, and a boat ~ for assistance. Plint ISLAim Lt. is between Scatari Id. and Flat Ft., and ia a revolving Lt. every Id sec, and easily distinguished from the neighbouring Lta. ; it is elevated 6S ft. and visible 12 m. all round the compass. Flat Island Point Lt. is on the eastern side of the entrance to Sydney Har- bour; this shows a fixed Lt. 70 ft. above the sea; visible 14 m. This latter Lt.-ho. will easily be distinguishable by its being painted vertically red-and- white. Black Bock Point.— South side of entrance to Chreat Bras-d'Or, a square, white, Lt.-ho., 23 ft. in height and 45 ft. above H.W., in lat. 46° 19' , and long. 60° 24' 0', about 100 ft. fropa the Pt. exhibiting a fixed Lt. visible 10 m. Bird Island Lt. is placed on Ciboux Id. ^ of a mile from north end, in lat. 46° 23' 10', and long. 60° 22' 30'. It revolves every minute, showing alternate red and white flashes ; is elevated 77 ft. and visible 14 m. LouiSBOURO Lt. stands on the north side of the entrance of the harbour, 60 fms. inshore on Lt.-ho. Pt. It shows a fixed Lt., elevated 85 ft., visible 16 m. ; and in order to distinguish it from the other Lt.-hos., and to render it conspicuous when the back land is covered with snow, it is built square, painted white, with vortical black stripes on cither side. Along the N.E. coast of Cape Breton Id., from Cape North to Cape Smoke, the water is deep, except near the shore. From Cape Smoke to St. Anne Bay is high land ; but from St. Aime Bay to Scatari Id. it becomes lower, and a vessel may otand inshore, in clear weather, to 15 or 10 fms. • CURRENTS. — Captain Bayfield observes, " Notwithstanding the bold nature of this coast, wrecks have not been unfrequent upon it in the dense fogs which accompany the easterly winds. They have generally occurred to vessels running and steering, as they supposed, a safe course to pass St. Paul's Id. into the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Unaware of, or not allowing for, the current so frequently found running out of the Gulf from the northward, and which had been acting upon their starboard bows for many hotirs, setting them many miles to the S.W. of their reckoning, they ran on shore under full sail. On one bccasion we found this current running out of the Gulf for many successive hours, at the rate of 2 knots, from N.N.E. ; at another time its rate was 1 knot from N.N.W., and at a third it was imperceptible. After long-continued winds from the E. or N.E., < which raise the level of the water in Bras-d'Or and neighbouring harbours, it is not unusual to find a current of 1 knot running for several successive days along the land from oif St. Anne to near Cape North, where it meets the current out of I the Gulf, and is turned to the eastward with great rippling. The fishermen affirm ( that it as often runs in the opposite direction ; and again, that at other times I there is a regular alternation of the flood and ebb streams. These remarks are! intended to show the inconstant nature of these currents, and the consequent | freat care required for the safety of a vessel when approaching this neighbour- ood in the fogs, which so often hide the lights on St. Paul's Id.'' 8T. ANNE HARBOUR. — LA BRAS d'oR. 17 r). yrhen bound r«s appear to 8 being niuob new Lt.-no8. the island on (V. 2' 13'. *"* ngLt..90lt. 6 m. TbeLt. the iouthwara al, and a boat » revolving J^t- , ; it is elevated to Sydney Hm- lis latter Lt.-ho. ,nd-white. .d'Or, a sauate, t. 46» 19' O', and visible torn, lorth end, m lat. lowing alternate , harbour, 60 fms. 3lel6m.;andm conspicuous when Ldte, with vertical I Cape Smoke, the Anne Bay wbigh and a vessel may From the Noi th Capo the land runs in a S.W. by W. | W. direction, 7 m. to Anp^o Harbour, wliore vessels can flud shelter. There is good anohomge behind the island, where boats can land, and water and provisions bo obtained. For the want of a knowlodge of such un eatablishment, many have been obliged to enduro both hunger and fatigue unrelieved. Aralson Oove, or Houtii P'>nd, ig 2 m. to the southward of Asp£o ; the coast then turns to the oaaU^ >vrd, 3 m., tu White Head, and from thenoe S.by E. h E., 31 m. to Gape Egmont, ana H.W. by 8., 10 m., to Inganish Id., between which and Oape Smoke (4 m. in the same diiootion) are two good bays 2^ m. deep, with 4 to 9 fms. in them. Middle Head, a narrow sUp of cliffy land, stretches out 2\ m. from the mainland, and forms these bays. There is a rock of 12 ft. water, close S.E. of Middle Head. The bay to the north of the head is called North Bay, where is the township or settlement of Inganish, on its northern shore. The lesser or South Bay is to the southward of Middle Head, and has a neat salt water pond in the S.W. and a fresh water pond in the N.W. part. Both these bays are open to easterly winds. From Capo Smoke, which is 9fi0 ft. h'gh, to Bentinck Ft., the course is S.W., and the distance 13 m. In this course the depths will be from 17 to 20 fms., and the coast cliffy and bold pretty close to until you come up to Breeding Oove, about 1^ m. to the northward of Bentinck Ft. Here a shou of 2 to 1 fm. borders the coast \ to i a mile from the land, right up to the narrows of St. Anne Harbour. Bentinck Ft. forms the western, and Oiboux Ids. the east- em side of St. Anne Harbour. ST. ANNE HABBOUB, or Port Dattphin, Captain Bayfield sa^s, " is capable of containing any number of vessels in security ; but the entrance is very narrow, with a tide of 4 knots ; and there is a dangerous bar outside, over which a depth of 16 ft. can be carried at L.W.* " In a strong N.E. wind, and especially when the tide is running out, the bar is covered with heavy breakers. The harbour is completely sheltered by Beach Ft., which is formed by large rolled stones and shingles, and reaches across from the northern to within 90 fms. of the southern shore; it is Quite bold at the southern extremity, and the entrance channel between it and Weed Fond Shoal is 13 fms. dee]^, but only 65 fms. wide. Within the entrance, on the north side of the channel, is the Fort Shoal, of mud, extending ^ a mile in from Beach Ft., nnd just cleared to the southward by the line of Weed Fond Beach and Bar Ft. in one. On the eastern side of the entrance, the small green mound of the old fort will bo easily recognised : its summit forms with the plaster or white gypsum cliff of Macleod Ft., in the head of the harbour, a leading-mark for crossing the bar in the best water." A stranger, unacc^uainted with the leadinjg-marks, should always endeavour to obtain a pilot. It is H.W. in the harbour, F. and C, at 8h. 42 m. Springs rise 6 ft., neaps 4^ ft. ; in the entrance the tides run 3 to 4 knots. LA BRAS D'OR. — ^This place having recently ■•"' in visited by many vcsscIh in the timber trade, some description may be accepta e. It appears from the charts, there ore two entrances to this lake or inlet, — i jo Northern or Great Entrance, and the Southern or lattle Entrance ; the former is thus desciibed by Mr. Thomas Kelley, pilot of the place ; but the names of the places he refers to are /"'^'o.ally unknown, thereby rendering the directions not so explicit as could be desired. Sailing Dieeotions fob the Grand Bras d'Or Entrance. — •' Ships from the southward must give Ft. Aconi a berth of about 2 m., and steer from thence for the eastern end of the inside Bird Id., called Hertford Id., until you bring M'Kenzio Ft. and Carey's Beach in one. Make for the Black Ilk. Ft. until you have Messrs. Duffus's Store just open of Ft. Noir ; then steer for Gooseberry Beach until you bring a clearing on Duncan's Head over M'Kenzie Ft. It is to be observed that ships coming in with the tide of flood, must keep Ft. Noir well aboard, to avoid the eddy and whirlpools on the north side of the gut, which has various settings. * By an Admiralty notice there appears to be 2 lu more water on the bar than is shown in the Admiralty charts. [G. & R. St. Lawrencte.] d Il i 18 SYDNEY HARBOUR. You must then steer for Pt. Jane, to keep the fair stream of tide as far as the Bound Cove, where there is fair anchorage in 7 or 8 fms., good holding ground. When abreast of the Round Cove, steer over for Duncan's Head ; and when abreast of this head, steer for Long Beach, until you bring a tall pine tree on the Upper Seal Id., in one with a notch or valley in the mountain. You will then maKe for the point of the Upper Seal Id., which will carry you clear of the shoals on the islands, as also the South Shoal, or Middle Gronnd. The marks for this shoal are, a white rook in the bank for the eastern end, and a white birch tree for the western end. When abreast of the western end of this shoal, you may keep the middle, there being no difficulty until you come to Red Hd. If bound to Kent Harbour, after doubling the Red Hd., steer for a remarkable red bank, covered with small bushes, until you bring Mr. DufiFus's house entirely open of the beach which is on the island. There is a depth of from 4 to 5 fms. in this harbour, and good holding ground." Obsebvatioits. — Messrs. Du£Eu8's store is a fishing establishment. Mr. Duffds's house is on Kent Id., formerly called Mutton Id. The aforesaid Thomas Eelley piloted the ship Pitt, of St. Eitt's, burthen nearly 400 tons, laden with timber, and drawing about 18 ft. safely through the foregoing described channel, from Kent Harbour. Ships bound to the Great Bras d'Or Entrance should always endeavour to obtain, a pilot, as there are dangers off the entrance on both sides, which render the channel indirect as 'well as narrow, and together with the rapid tides and the want of buoys and beacons, make this a very dangerous pass for a stranger to attempt, except imder favourable circumstances of weather, wind, and tide. It is H.W., F. and C, at Carey Pt., at 8h. 40 m. Springs rise 3 ft., neaps 1 ft. 8 in. In the entrance the tides run 4 and 5 knots, and sometimes amount to 6 knots. Captain Bayfield remarks, " If the entrance of the Great Bras d'Or were buoyed, a large phip might back and fill in against the wind, with the aid of the strong tide; but; without that guidance, a fair wind, and weather clear enough to allow the leading marks to be seen, are indispensable." SYDNEY HABBOUB, formerly called Spanish River, the entrance to which is 12 m. S.E. of that of St. Anne, is another excellent harbour, having a safe and secure entrance, with soundings, regular from sea into 5 fms. This place abounds with excellent coal. SYDNEY is the capital of Cape Breton Id. ; it is a free port, and the residence of the principal officers of the island. Here are the courts of justice, and other public offices, barracks, &c. It is a thriving place, and an extensive coal trade is carried on ; and the land in the vicinity well cultivated. Sydney Harbour, Captain Bayfield observes, "is one of the finest ports in the world, being equally easy of access and egress, and capable of containing any number of the largest vessels in perfect safety. It is 3 m. wide at the entrance ; but the navigable channel contracts rapidly to ti:e breadth of ^ a mile between the two bars which are of sand and shingle, and exteitd from the shore on either side at 5 m. within the Lt.-ho. on Flat Pt. Inside of these bare the harbour divides into the W. and S. Arms ; the former being open to E.N.E. winds, except at the Coal-loading Ground, where the vessels anchor under the shelter of the N.W. bar ; and at North Sydney, where they may lie in like manner under Allen Pt. The South Arm being completely sheltered from the sea by the S.E. bar, affords safe anchorage in every part. The town of Sydney, 3| m. above this arm, is exceedingly well situate on the west side and summit of a peninsula 55 ft. high. It has deep water close to the wharves, and the arm continues navigable for vessels to Sydney Bridge, a distance of 2 m. But at present the principal business is carried on at the Loading Ground, within the N.W. bar, where the railroad from the mines terminates ; where a fast increasing village is springing up ; and where the numerous vessels from the United Statos and the Colonics anchor, to take in their cargoes of coals. When approaching the harbour from the northward, with a leading-wind, steer so as to pass the reef off Cranberry Hd., the western point of the entrance (on SCATABI ISLANDS. — LOUISBOUBG HABBOUB. Id ide as far as tbe holding ground, ead ; and when pine tree on the You will then ear of the shoals le marks for this ite birch tree for il, you may keep [d. If bound to rkable red bank, ;irely open of the . in this harbour, at. Mr. Duffiis's d Thomas Eelley ien with timber, ed channel, from ieavour to obtain, which render the id tides and the for a stranger to ad, and tide. It , neaps 1 ft. 8 in. int to 6 knots. L'Or were buoyed, aid of the strong enough to allow ntrance to which laving a safe and lis place abounds nd the residence Listice, and other ensive coal trade dest ports in the containing any a,t the entrance ; a mile between ! shore on either Eirs the harbour ^. winds, except |e shelter of the ler under Allen the S.E. bar, labove this arm, pula 55 ft. high, navigable for I the principal I bar, where the 'e is springing [d the Colonics tng-wind, steer Ve entrance (on which lies Cran Bk., with only 16 ft., ^ a mile o£F shore), in 10 fms. ; and when the high cliff of Mine Pt. opens out to the eastward of Swivel Pt., haul into the harbour. If bound to the Loading Ground run along the N.W. shore, in not less than 5 fms., until past Mine Pt., then sheer to the southward, sufficienfily to bring Jackson and Allen Pts. (two shin^e points up the West Arm) in one ; or untu the Lt.-ho. comes on with Petre Pt. ; either of which, or at nip^ht the depth of 6| ^8. will lead clear of the N.W. bar, which is very steep, having 5^ fms. close to it. When the wharves at the Loading Groimd bear N.W. the vessel will be well within f^e bar, and may haul in and choose her berth in 5 or 6 fms. mud bottom. Whe. \pproaching from the etwtward, pass the Lt.-ho. no nearer than | a mile, or in noi; less than 7 fms. ; to avoid Petre Beef (dry at L.W., a mile within the Lt.-ho.), do not haul into the harbour until Daly Pt. opens out to the northward of GiUivray Pt. ; and to clear the shoal at Petre Pt., and farther in, do not approach nearer than | a mile, or in 5^ fms., as you run along the eastern shore. When the Lt.-ho. and Petre Pt. come in one, keep them so as you run from them, and they Mrill lead to the Loading Grotmd as before. Those unacquainted with the leading marks should take a pilot, as both the S.E. and N.W. bars are steep-to. H.W., F. and C, at 9h. Springs rise about 5 ft., neaps 4 ft. On Flat Pt., without the east side of the entrance, is the Lt.-ho. noticed in p. 16. S.E. of Sydney Harbour are Indian Bay and Glace Bay, both places of anchor- age, although little frequented at present ; beyond these is Morien, or Oow Bay, at the northern Pt. of which is Flint Id. ; there is a passage between this island and the main, with 12 fms., but this should be adopted with the greatest caution, on account of the numerous rocks under water off its west end. This bay is open to the north-eastward, and its farther end is enoimxbered with an extensive shaUow flat, which dries at L.W. Flint Island Lt.— See p. 16. MIBA BAY is to the southward, and its entrance is bounded by Cape Morien and the Id. of Scatari; the bay is wide, and runs in 9 m., branching off at its upper part into two rivers ; there is deep water within it, from 20 to. 6 fms., and clear from dangers, but it affords no shelter for shipping. SCATARI ISLAND is in about the lat. of 46° I'; its length £. and W. is 5 m., and its breadth about 2 m.; it is separated from Cape Breton by a channel into Mira Bay ; but this is too hazardous for strangers, and frequented only by those coasters who are well acquainted with its dangers. Scatari Id. Lt. — See p. 16. As vessels from Europe frequently first make the land about Scatari Id., the revolvipg Lt. on the eastern point will be found of great service ; and it appears by the late survey of the St. Peter's Bk., that in lat. 46°, the western edge of the bank, in 40 fms. pebbles and broken shells, lies E.S.E. or E. true, 11m. from the Lt.-ho. on Scatari Id. ; and S. ^ W., distant 9 m. from the Lt.-ho., is the Curdo Bank ; this is a small spot of one cast, 10 fms., 15 m. true east of Loiiisbourg. LOUISBOUBG- HABBOUB is situate on the S.E. side of Cape Breton Id. to the westward of Scatari Id., and is very easy of ingress and egress. Be careful to avoid the Nag's Hd., a sunken rock, on the starboard hand going in. The east part of the harbour is the safest. Water is plentiful here, but wood is scarce. The entrance to the harbour is | a mile wide, and the Nag's Hd. Bk., a sunken rock on the starboard hand, is nearly one-third from the Lt.-ho. point, and has no more than 3 ft. on it at L.W. The port side going in is the boldest. Louisbourg Lt.-ho. stands on the north side of the entrance to the harbour. — See p. 16. The following remarks may be of service to vessels bound to Louisbourg : — When coming from the eastward, they should bring the Lt. to bear W. by N., or more northerly before nmning for it ; and from the westward N. by E., or more northerly, in order to clear Green Id. and the ledges | of a mile S. by W. f W. from the Lt. When in the entrance of the harbour, with the Lt. bearing N.N.E., 20 GABARUS BAY. — MADAME ISLAND. f: ! i 2 or 3 cables' length distance, steer W.N.W. for ^ a mile, to avoid the Nag's Hd., bearing W. by X. from the Lt. The N.E. arm of the harbour affords the safest anchorage. OABABTTS BAY. — ^From the entrance of Louisbourg to Ghiyon Isle, called also the Portland Isle, (30 ft. high,) the course is W.S.W., and the distance 101m. Between is the bay called Oabarus Bay, which is spacious, and has a depth of from 20 to 7 fms. Off the south point of this bay, called Gape Gabarus, and between that and Guyon Id. are a number of islets and rooks, which are dangerous. About 9 m. to the westward of Gto,barus Bay is the Fourch4 Inlet, a narrow winding inlet, where small vessels may run into and lie land-locked ; and 9 m. south-westward of this is the remarkable white cliff, called Cape Blancherotte. The shore now winds to the westward to Bed Head and the Isle of Madame. FotTROHE Bat is a slight indentation of the land between Guyon Id. and Fourchg Hd. This is full of rocks and shoals, and should be avoided. A good mark to avoid these dangers and also the Pot Bk. of 9 ft., nearly a mile S.S.E. of Fourchd Hd., is Shag and Gh-een Bks., in line N.E, by E. % E. The Shag Bk. is a rock Ijiug W. by S., 1| m. from Ghiyon, and is 20 ft. high. The Green Bks. are W.N.W., :i of a nule from Ghiyon. Blancherotte, or White Cliff, is a remarkable cliff of whitish earth, in lat. 45° 39', and long. 60° 25'. At 3 m. to the westward is a small woody island, upwards of ^ a mile from shore, and off the little harbour of Santesprit. The land from hence to Madame Id. is generally low, and presents several banks of bright red earth, with beaches between them. From the White Cliff, which is called in the late survey, West Hd., the coast trends west, 11^ m. to Michaux Ft., and Bed Ft. about 3 m. more to the west- ward. Between West Pt. and Michaux Ft. are several rocks, and the Basque Ids., 1^ m. before you come to the point. Westward of Michaux Pt. are the Michaux Ledges, and Bed Id. off Bed Pt. < The north side of Michaux Pt. and of Basque Ids. in one will clear the rocks off the coast, and lead just inside a 3 fms. patch, called Bad Neighbour ; and Bed Id. open of Michaux Pt. will clear the Basque Ids. and shoals to the southward, but will lead on the Michaux Ledges, if continued past the point ; therefore, haul off to the southward when past the Basque Ids. MADAME ISLAND. — This is the largest island of a group between Bed Hd. and the southern entrance of the Gut of Canso. The northern extent from E. to W. is about 10 m., and from the northern coast to Cape Hogan, the southern point of the island, the distance is about 7^ m. ; thus forming a kind of triangle. Fetitdegrat Id., of some 2^ m. in extent, almost joins it to the S.E., and forms the soutiiem shore of the Bay of Bocks, on the east side of Madame Id. Green Id. is a small island about 1 m. S.E. of the Fetitdegrat. Fiddle Bk., described here- after, awash at L.W. is 1^ m., E.S.E. of Green Id. On the S.W. side of Madame Id. there are several islands close to ; that to the extreme west being the largest and called Janvrin Id. To the southward of Janvrin is the Creighton Id., forming what is called Arichat Head, with the settlement of little Arichat within. Arichat Harbour is situate at the S.W. extreme of Madame Id., with the Jerseyman's Ids and Henley Bks. before it, thus forming the Crid Passage to the northward, and the principtd entrance to the harbour to the southward of the group. These islands are situate on a shoal that surrounds them. Marachi Ft., on the south side of the harbour where the light is placed (see p. 21) has two shoals off it, the outer one lying W.S.W., distant a mile, with 2 fms. on it; the other about midway between it and the point. Cape Hogan, as before observed, forms the most southern part of Madame Id., and here rises Albion Cliff, which is rocky, remarkably high, and precipitous. The channel to the northward of Madame Id., called Lennox Passage, from abreast of Bed Ft., runs up about ISi .W. by N., but when having proceeded about 6 m. on the course you must near the N.E. coast of the island in order to avoid the Horse-shoe Heads. This passage leads up to St. Peter's Bay, Coteau Inlet, and some others, but of little note. ARIGHAT HARBOUB. — CHEDABUGTO BAY. V 21 Fiddle and Cerbeatts Books. — ^The two outlying dangers, near Madame Id., are the Fiddle Bk., already noticed, and the Cerberus Bk., also awash ; this latter lies W. ^ N. from ArichatLt.-ho., distant 3| m., and S.S.W. ^W. from AriohatHd. 2f m. Th'j Cerberus Bk. has a red buoy placed upon it, moored in 15 Ims., about 1 a cable's length S.S.W. of the rock. Fiddle Bock is E.S.E., 1§ m. from Green Id. ; it is awash at L.W., and the sea breaks on it almost always. It is small, deep all round, and has 60 fms., at a cable's length S.W. of it. Heath Id., the extreme south head of Petitdegrat Id. will lead clear of this rock, either to the northward or southward, according as it is kept open to the north or to the south of Green Id. Cerberus Bock is exceedingly dangerous in dark nights or toggy weather. Cape Hogan and Green Id. in one, bearing E. by S. ^ S., will lead clear to the southward of it 4 cables' length. Arichat Church steeple, and the eastern extrem- ity of the western peninsula of Jerseyman Id., in line E. by N. i N., will lead a cable's length to the S.E. ; and Eddy Pt. and Ship Pt., in one, N.W. hj N. | N., will lead a mile to the westward ; as the above marks are distant, to avoid danger when bound westward, keep some part of Green Id. in sight to the southward of Cape Hogan, until Arichat Hd. bears N.E. ^ N., then shape a course direct for the Gut of Canso. ABICHAT HABB0T7B has two entrances : the north-western one being very narrow, ought never to be attempted without a leading wind, as there is not room for a large ship to swing to her anchors, should she be taken aback. When going in, give the ledge, to the westward of Seymour Id., a good berth, not approaching it nearer than 8 fms., and keep as near as possible in mid-channel. To enter by the south-eastern passage, steer for Pt. Marache, rounding it in 8 fms., at about 2 cables' length o£F; and keep that shore on board, at nearly th«. .aae distance and depth of water, until the church bears north ; you will then see a small house (the Dead House) on the top of the hill behind the church ; bring that on with the east end of the church, and then steer in that direction ; you will thus pass midway to the eastward of the Eleven and Five-Feet Shoals, and also to the west- ward of the Fiddle ^Head Shoal. Proceed with this mark on, until a red house on Fiddle Head Pt. comes on with the dark rocky extreme of the point, bearing E. ^ S. ; you will then be to the northward of the Twelve-Feet Shoal, and may haul up to the westward, where you will find excellent anchorage, on fine soft mud, opposite to the low sandy beach on the middle of Seymour Id., in 10 ims. H.W., F. and C, at 8h. 10 m. Springs rise 5 ft., neaps 4 ft. CHEDABUOTO BAY is wide and spacious, and may be said to be compre- hended between Cape Hogan and Cape Canso to the east, and to extend 20 m. to Guysborough Harbour, and to the Ghit of Canso ; it is bold-to on both shores, and pretty free from dangers ; the Cerberus Bk., already described, and the Hydra Shoal, of 2 fms., lying 1 J m. S. by E. from Murdock Hd., on the N.W. shore of the bay, and on the meriditui of Crow Harboui*. The southern shore of the bay is high, and runs nearly true east and west, having Fox Id. Bay and Crow Harbour for shelter along it. Lights at the Southern entrance of the Out of Canso. Cape Canso. — The Lt.-ho. is situate on the north part of Cranberry Id. in lat. 46° 19' 49' and long. 60° 65° 29*. It exhibits two fixed lights, placed vertically, 12 yards apart ; the upper 75 ft., the lower 40 ft. above H.W. ; visible 16 and 9 m. respectively. The building is of wood, octagon, striped red and white, horizontally. Arichat Harbour. — This Lt.-ho. is placed on Marache Pt., tl ) south point of entrance. It is a square wooden building, painted white, and shows a fixed Lt., elevated 34 ft. and visible 8 m. Green Island. — This Lt.-ho. is a square wooden building, painted white, 31 ft. in height, and 70 ft. above H.W., erected on the summit of the island, in lat. 45* 28' 51' and long. 60° 53' 40', and exhibits a fixed red light, visible 10 m. all roimd the compass. Guysborough Harbour. — A square wooden tower, painted white, on the west side of entrance, near Peart Pt., in lat. 45° 22' 47' and long. 61° 29' 11', shows a fixed light, elevated 30 ft., visible 8 m., all night. 22 GUT OF OANSO. 'IH- ■i-i Eddt Point, Out of Oanso. — A wooden square building, painted white, with a black diamond, shows two horizontal fixed hghts, 8 yards apart, elevated 25 ft. each, and visible 8 m. Stafleton Point, soxtth side of Bhif Habboxtb.— A square white Lt.-ho., 24 ft. in height and 44 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed red light, visible 7 m., lat. 48» 36' 40' and long, 61° 22' ()'. Cape Canso is environed by a cluster of islands, reefs, and shoals, to the distance of 4 m. from the cape, the outermost lies E.N.E., and is the Chime Rk., having a spax buoy upon it. The Bass is | a mile S.W. of it. Between the Grime Bk. and Ca^e Canso is Cranberry Id., where the light is exhibited. The Harbour of Canso is inside the Derabie Ids., between the group and the mainland, and east of Durell Id., which latter is separated from the main by the Tickle Channel, ^o take the Harbour of Canso, or to seek shelter within the various islands surround- ing the cape, you must have a pilot or local knowledge. Fox Id. anchorage is one of the greatest mackerel fisheries in North America during the months of September and October. When sailing in you must pass to the westward of Fox Id., giving it a berth of | of a mile, as there are rooks both above and below water, with 3 and 4 f ms. close to them. Tou may anchor in 4 to 10 fms., with the west end of the island bearing from E.N.E. to N.N.E., keeping about midway between the island and the main. The water shoals gradutuly to the bar, which extends from the island to the opposite shore ; it has not more than 6 or 7 ft. on its deepest part, and dries in one place about ^ of the distance from the island to the main. With northerly and with westerly winds the fishing- vessels ride to the eastward of it, in from 2 to 4 fms., and shift to the westwMd with easterly winds. Crow Harbour, on the south side of Chedabucto Ba^, is capable of containing small ships of war, merchant vessels, &c. The bottom is good, and the mark for entering is, to keep the beacon, on the south side of the harbour, in line with a remarkable fine tree, upon the high land, which will lead you clear of the Corbyn Bks., and also of Book Id. Bk., 25 fms. from the N.W. point of Book Id. GxTYSBOBOTJOH Habboub Or Milford Haven, at the head of Chedabucto Bay, is 10 m. from Crow Harbour. It is an extensive inlet running to the northward, with a depth sufficient for large ships, but with a dangerous oar, an entrance so narrow and crooked, and Buch rapid tides, that the assistance of an experienced pilot is indispensable, even for a small vessel. H.W., F. and C, 8 h. 20 m. Springs rise 6^ ft., neaps 4 J ft. TIDES IN THE neighbottbhood of the GrT of Canso. — Eastward of Madame Id. and between that and Bed Hd. the flood runs N.N.W., ebb S.S.E., about ^ a knot ; off the S.E. part of the island it nms W. ^ N. and E. ^ S., 1 knot ; off Durells Id^ N.W. | N. and S.E. | S., about i a knot, and approaching the Gut of Canso, off Cape Argos, N.N.W. i W. and S.S.E. J E., J of a knot. Habitants Habboitb, on the main of Cape Breton Id., before you enter the Gut of Canso, is well sheltered, and has good anchorage throughout ; when you are sailing in, keep near Evans Id., to avoid Loilg Ledge, stretching off the northern shore, then run in mid channel. Tarbalton Bay and Sea Coal Harbour have each good an horage in 4, 5, and 6 fms., muddy bottom, and well sheltered. These latter are convenient anchorages when taken short by a N.W. wind at the S. entrance of the Gut. When bound downwards, if caught with a southerly wind, you will find good shelter under Tarbalton Head, where you may ride safely in the bay, in 5 or 6 fms. The OUT of OANSO. — ^When off Cape Canso, and bound for the Gulf of St. Lawrence, the best passage is through the Gut of Canso, being shorter and having the advantage of several anchoring places, out of the strength of the tide, in case of contrary winds or bad weather. Having passed the dangers of Cape Canso, be careful to avoid the Cerberus Bk., on which the sea breaks when there is any wind; it bears from Arichat Hd. S.S.W. ^ W., 2f m. Bound Eddy Ft., at the distance of at least | a mile, in order to clear the shoal stretching off that point, and which will readily be perceived by the race of the tide it forms. You ma^ stop a tide in moderate weather, abreast of Eddy Cove, within a mile of the point, in from jd white, with elevated 25 ft. wliite Lt.-ho., t, visible 7 m., to the distance , Bk., having a Grime Ws. and trbour of Oanso Ld, and east of B Ohannel. To ands surround- North America ou must pass to B are rocks both I may anchor in J.E. to N.N.E., le water shoals Ite shore ; it has e about i of the 1 westerly winds and shift to the )le of containing md the mark for r in line with a ,air of the Corbyn Rook Id. Chedabucto Bay, o the northward, X, an entrance so »f an experienced h. 20 m. Springs CAPE NORTH. — SEA WOLP ISLAND. as 7 to 12 fms., and thence bv keeping about mid-ohannel, you may run through the Gut free from danger. Holland Gove aflfords good anchorage out of the strength of the tide, in 6 or 7 fms., muddy bottom. At Ship Harbour there is excellent anchorage in 4 and 5 fms. , soft bottom. In entering, give the starboard side," which is flat, a berth of a cable's length, and run on until you shut in the X. entrance of the Gut. You may obtain wood here, and water at Yenus's Gove on the opposite shore. Plaster Gove is plainly distinguished by its white appearance, when opposite to Holland Harbour ; the anchorage, at its entrance, is of s6ft mud, in from 4 to 10 fms. In the Gilt of Ganso it is H.W., F. and 0., at 9h. 10m. ; springy rise 4^ ft., neaps 3. CAPE BRETON ISLAND (WEST COAST). FBOM GAPE NOBTH TO THE GUT OP GANSO. The N.W. coast of Gape Breton Id., all along from Gape North to Gape linzee is, in the inland nart of the country, very high, but in some places it falls down gradually towards the shore. Sailmg along on this side of the island, which is all bold, you may safely run alonv it at the distance of 6 m., until you arrive at the parallel of 46°, when, if bound to the Gut of Ganso, you may haul in S. clear of aU danger ; or bring the high land of Gape Porcupine (which is a mount on the western shore, 4 m. within the entrance of the Gut of Ganso, 640 ft. high), just open, and it clears the Indique Banks and Shoals. In uie winter season the shores of Gape Breton Id., when the weather is mild, abound with all sorts of fish ; plenty of lobsters and oysters are to be found towards Prince Edward's Id., especially at Hillsborough Bay. GAPE NORTH, which forms the western poiut of the entrance to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, is in lat. 47' 2' 35', and long. 60» 24' 66'; Gape St. Lawrence is W.N.W. i N., 7 m. from Gape North, between which the land curves in a little to the southward ; near the head of this bight are 12 fms. From Gape St. Lawrence the land runs in a S.W. by W. ^ W. direction, 32 m., to Chetican Pt. ; 3 J m. to the N. -eastward of the Gape is the entrance to an inlet, which runs in S. -westward 2^ m., in which is a settlement ; its entrance is about ^ a mile wide, on the eastern side of which is Ghetican B., fit for small vessels. Salmon B. is S.W. ^ S., 10 m. from Ghetican Pt. SEA WOLF ISLAND is 7 J m. W.S.W. f W. from the western point of Salmon E., and 2^ m. from the shore, having 6 fms. between ; this island is about I'/io m. in length, and bold-to, and is 200 ft. high. You can only land in fine weather, at other times the sea rolls completely roimd it, and the anchorage behind it is-never safe, the ground being rocky. Light. — The Lt.-ho. is on the summit of the island and shows a fixed Lt., 298 ft. above H.W., and is vis. 21 m. The tower is square and white. To vessels in dangerous proximity to the island, the light may become obscured by the abrupt cliffs on the sides of the island. Cape Mabou is 14 m. S.W. bjr W. i W. from the Sea Wolf Id. ; and 4^ m. S.W. of the Cape is Mabou B. This river is | a mile wide and continues so for full 3 m., where two streams fall intc it. The entrance to Mabou B., is at the southern end of a low sand bar, is only j a cable wide, with 4 ft. at L.W., and the tide frequently runs there at the rate of 4 knots ; it is, therefore, a dangerous place to enter, except with flood-tide and smooth sea. H.W., F. and C, at 9 h., springs rise 4 ft., neaps 2 ft. ; the shores are well settled by flourishing farms on either side ; the scenery is beautiful, the mountains to the N., 1000 ft. above the sea, are a very remarkable feature of the coast. Cape Linzee is 4 m. W.S.W. of Mabou B. ; this Cape, with Smith and Henry Ids., 4 m. in a S.W. direction from it, forms the N.E. point of George Bay, and mmmm > , k -1 24 PORT HOOD. — THE GUT OP CA!feO. Oape Qeorge the S.W. point. From Oape Linzee to the entrance of the Gut of Oanso, the coast runs nearly 8. by W. { W., 20 m., and from Cape George the entrance of the Gut bears 8.E. by B., 20 m. POBT HOOD is the only safe anchorage on the W. coast of Oape Breton Id., it was formerly a much more secure harboiir ; Smith Id. being then a peninsula, united to the mninland by a range of high sand-hills, which has since been entirely swept away, and the sands spread over the harbour. During a gale from the N., the sea made a breach in this sand-bar ; the width has since increased, and the present channel is 6 cables wide, with 9 ft. at L.W. The anchorage is still safe in 3 to 4^ fms. on the E. side of Smith's Id., which forms a bay, and is safe in all winds. The village at Port Hood is on the mainland, opposite the N. part of Smith's Id., and has a church and court-house. Supplies and fresh provisions may be obtained here, but there is no good watering place, the supply from the weUs being scanty and not very good. H.W., F. and C, at 9h. : springs ri^e 4| ft., neaps 2 ft. The flood comes from the N., and ebb from the S. Light.— PoBT Hood Lt.-ho., in lat. 46°, and long. 61° 31' 40', is a square white tower, and shows a fixed Lt. 54 ft. above the sea, vis. 10 m. ; the Lt. shows red on the N. side, and white to the southward. Smith's Id. is 2 m. long, and 210 ft. high, and has flourishing farms on the inner siue of the island, where there is a sandy beach. Henbt Id. (Just-au-Corps), is a mile W.S.W. of Smith's Id., is only a mile long and 205 ft. high ; it is bold to seaward, but shallow water runs off from its S.E. extremity i of a mile to 3 fms., and at f of a mile to 5 fms. The passage between these islands is extremely dangerous and should never be attempted, being full of roclty shoals. JxjDiQtn: Bank, with only 4^ fms. on it, is on the E. side of George Bay ; its inner edge is 2 m. from the eastern shore, with a clear channel of 11 to 7 fms. between them ; its aorthem edge is S. by W. ^ W., d| m. from Henry Id. ; and its centre is E. by S. f S., 13 m. from Cape George. A vessel will pass to the westward of this bank, by keeping Cape Linzee shut in behind Smith's Id. ; or the whole of the high land of Cape Porcupine open to the westward of Heffeman Ft. Jtr^lQUi: Shoals.— The greatest danger in St. George's Bay is a rock, about I a vMe in length, if the very shallow part only is reckoned, on which is 4 ft., but there are patches of 2 or 3 fms. and much rocky ground both to the N. and S. of it. On the outer point of the shoal, Port Hood Church is just shut in behind Susan Ft., a point 3 m. south of Port Hood Lt., bearing N.N.E. ; Long Ft. S. by E., 2f m. ; Campbell Ft. the nearest part of shore E. ^ S., 1^ m. ; and Judiquo Church N.E. by E. By keeping the whole of the high land of Oape Porcupine open to the west of Heffeman Ft. S. ^ E., it will lead to the westward of the shoal in 6 or 7 fms. ; or the Church of Fort Hood kept open of Susan Ft., clears it in not less than 4 fms. THE GUT OF CANSO may be considered the befit and most frequented passage for ships bound to or from Prince Edward's Id., and other places in the Northum- berland Strait, because it is shorter, and has the advantage of anchorage in case of ontrary winds or bad weather. Its length is about 1dm., and its breadth about i of a mile. The east side is low, with beaches, but the west shore is for the most part high and rocky ; Oape Porcupine is remarkably so. The deepest water is on the western shore, but both shores are bold-to and sound, except some sunken rocks, near to the shore ; one near the western side of Plaster Cove, about ^ a cable's length from shore : one off Cape Porcupine on the opposite shore ; a third on the western side about 2 m. to the southward of Ship Harbour ; then one about midway between the southern entrance of the Gu- .r d Ship Harbour, and nearly a cable's length from the eastern shore ; and a f'*tb about 100 fms. without Bear Hd., the S.E. part of the Gut. On the opposite shore there is a rock close in to the land, about a mile to the southward of Melford Creek ; these rocks have 6 or 8 ft. ou them. Mill Creek, Gypsum or Plaster Cove, Venus Creek, Ship Harbour, Holland Cove, and Eddy Cove, afford excellent anchorages, with a moderate depth, and out of the stream of the tide, which generally sets in from the southward. GUT OF 0AN8O. 26 inoe of tho Gut of Cape George the f Cape Breton Id., then a peninsula, since been entirely I gale from the N., ) increftsed, and the orage is stUI safe in r, and is safe in aU jite the N. part of nd fresh provisions bhe supply from the it9h. - springs nee 3, the S. 31' 40', is a square } m. ; the Lt. shows shing farms on the , Id., is only a mile ter runs o«E from its 5 fms. The passage never be attempted, of George Bay; its mnel of U to 7 fms. rom Henry Id. ; and sssel will pass to the d Smith's Id. ; or ^e ard of Heffeman l?t. Bay is a rock, about on which is 4 ft., but totheN.andS. of it. shut in behind Susan Long Pt. S. by E., n m. ; and Judiquo id of Cape Porcupine the westward of the of Susan Pt., clears 1st frequented passage VacesintheNorthum- E anchorage in case of ats breadth about 3 of ^e is for the most part feepest water is on the Vt some sunken rocks, Pove, about i a cable s kite shore ; a third on oour ; then one about , Harbour, and n^rly dOO fms. without Bear Ire is a rock close in to 1 these rocks have 6 or Creek, Ship Harbour, Vith a moderate deptn, from the southward, but very irregularly, being mnoh influenoed by the winds. After stronjg N.W. winds, which happen daily during the fall of the year, the water in the Gulf of St. Lawrence is rendered low, which causes the current to run northward through the Gut at the rate of 4 or 5 knots, and the contrary happens after noutherly winds. Light. — ^A Lt,-ho., exhibiting a fixed light, is established on the western side of the entrance to the Gut, in lat. 45° 41' 42'. The tower is white, and stands 120 yards from the shore. The light is 110 ft. above H.W., and maybe seen 18 m. distant, or between Cape George and Port Hood. There is good anchorage under the Lt.-ho., with off-shore winds. Vessels frequently stop there to wait for the tide. It is H.W., F. and 0., in the Gut (Plaster Cove) at 9h. 15 m., but the tide in mid-channel runs an hour after H. and L.W.; springs rise 4^ ft., neaps 3 ft. Sometimes, in or after strong winds, the currents appear as if not influenced by the tide, but run at the rate of 3 or 4 knots. From Cape George to the entrwace of the Gut the course is S.E. by_ S., 20 miles ; but it is to be observed that there is Jack Shoal, a ledge of rocks in the ofling, near Aubushee, some of which are nearly dry at L.W., and nearly in the direct course towards the Gut ; these must, of course, be avoided. Jack Shoal runs out N.E. by N. from Cape Jack 1 mile to 3 fms., and 1^ mile to 5 fms. It has often proved dangerous to vessels in thick weather, and should be approached with great caution. Upon entering the Gut from the northward there will be seen on your port hand a red house on a point called Belle Ashe's Pt., off which, nearly a cable's length from the shore, is a sunken rook, already noticed, which may readily be distingfuished by the eddy of the tide ; within this point to the S.E. is Gypsum or Plaster Cove. To sail into the cove keep nearly in the middle, and when in 10 fms. I let go your anchor. You will find sufficient room for swinging round in 7 fms., or smaller vessels in 4 or 5 fms., bottom mud. In going in keep the cove open, so that the whole of the Bridge, as well as Plaster CBffs above it, may be seen, and you will avoid the Dixon I&. There is an excellent watering place directly opposite Plaster Cove, in the bay between Cape Porcupine and Eeaton Pt. Ship Hakboxtb is about half-way down the Gut on the eastern side; here there is excellent anchorage in 4 or 5 fms., soft bottom. In entering, give the starboard I side a berth of a cable's length (it being flat), and run on until you shut in the I northern entrance of the Gut. On the N.E. side of the harbour is a fine settle- Iment, with stores and wharves, where vessels may receive repairs, or winter in Isafety. Vessels of less than 12 ft. draught may run in without difficulty, passing ■over the Einvir Shoal at all times, but larger vessels should pass northward of (that danger. Holland Cove is nearly opposite to Ship Harbour ; it also affords for small iressels good anchorage off it. mouth. The best berth for anything larger than a Ashing schooner is in 7 or 8 fms., mud bottom, with Pirate Id. bearing S.E. by S., and distant a cable's length out of the strength of the tide, in 6 or 7 fms. Ships from the northward may proceed through the Gut with safety, by keeping learly in mid-channel, there being no danger till they arrive at the southern ^3oint, called Eddy Pt., but from which extends a long spit of sand, with large round stones, which must be left on the starboard side, at the distance of | a mile. ~7he race of the tide will serve to guide you from it. Having passed the spit of Sddy Pt., you may steer to the S.S.E., imtU the fixed light at Marache Pt., riohat Harbour, bears E.N.E. Hence you can proceed to sea by the chart. Ships coming down the Gut of Canso, and having reached Eddy Pt., or as far its Cape Argos, and having met with a S.E. or S.S.W. wind, that cannot hold their Dwn by beating, may bear up and come to an anchor in Turbalton Bay, under Turbalton Hd., where they may ride safely in from 5 to 7 fms., muddy bottom, rbalton Bay is that space tc the northward of Babbit Id., and between it and Svans Id. The marks for anchoring in Turbalton Bay are to bring the peninsula point in a line with Turbalton Hd., bearing S. or S. ^ W. ; you are then sheltered [G. & B. St. Lawbenoe.] b 26 OEOROE BAT. hj the rooks or spit that runs from Turbalton Hd., in 4 to 5 and 6 fms., and will nde very safely on good holding ground. But with a large vessel go no further in than the line of Turbalton Hd. and Capo Argos touching, in 4^ nus. at L.W., mud bottom ; the reof will break off the swell from the southward. Should the wind shift to the S.W. or N.W., you must up anchor, and boat out of the bay into Chedabucto Bay, or proceed on your passage to the southward. Should the wind overblow at S.W., so as to prevent your beating to windward into Chedabucto '. Bay, you must come to an anchor in Eddy Cove, bringing the low point of Eddy | Cove to bear S.S.E. or S. by E., in 6, 6, or 7 fms., taking care to give the ship sufficient cable, lest you drive off the bank into doop water, from 16 to 20 fms. Be cautious when coming downwards, after passing Eddy Ft., of running in the direction of the Cerberus Bk. Ill THE SOUTH COAST OF THE GULF. FROM THE GUT OF CANSO TO POINT ESCUMENAC, PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND, AND NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT. GEORGE BAY, or ST. GEORGE'S BAY, to the north of the Gut of Canso, I has been partially described in a former chapter relating to the Western Coast of Cape Breton Id. ; we here take up the Coast of Nova Scotia from the Gut of | Canso. The Lt.-ho. at the northern entrance of the Gut of Canso has been already i noticed (p. 25). Half a mile S.E. of the Lt.-ho. there is pretty good anchorage | to stop or wait tide in all winds from the southward. Havre Botjche. — This inlet is the first harbour west of the Gut between that I and Cape Jack. It is small, but convenient for small vessels. There are but 4 ft. I at L.W. at the entrance, but 13 or 14 ft. within. It is H.W., F. and C, about | 9h. 30 m. Rise 4 and 2 ft., springs and neaps. Cape Jack is 2 m. to the westward, wMch, together with Jack Shoal, was | noticed in p. 25. TRACADIE HARBOUR is 4| m. W. by S. from Cape Jack. The entrance is I narrow, and the depth over the bar at L.W. is only 2 ft., and is only fit for very I small vessels at H.W. The village and church are about a mile within the| entrance ; its large church can be seen from a great distance out at sea. Little Tracadie is about midway between the former and Capo Jack, and is a I similar but smaller harbour, with only 1 ft. on the bar at L.W. H.W., F. and C.,| in these latter inlets, same as Havre Bouche. To the N.N.W. ^ W. of the entrance to Tracddie is the Bowman Bank, which I must not be approached in a vessel of great draught ; you will clear it by not I bringing the north point of the island of Pomquet to the westward of W.S.W.| The bank extends 2 m. off the coast, with several rocky points. POMQUET ROAD is 7 m. to the westward of Cape Jack ; ships of any sizel ma^ lie in safety. In sailing in from the northward you will leave the Island ofl Pomquet on the starboard side, keeping close to a rock, which appears 5 or 6 ft. above water. This rock is steep-to, and off the east end of the island. Outsidel of it, at the distance of | of a mile, are several sunken rocks, which are dangerous.! After passing the rock, a bay will open on the starboard side, which you must I stand into, till you are shut in with the island, where there is anchorage inl Si fms., at about ^ a mile from the island, with the south point of the islandl N. by E. i E. Light. — PoMQtrET Island. — A square white Lt.-ho. is erected on the N.E. end| of this island, 23 ft. in height, and 50 ft. above H.W., showing a fixed red Lt., visible 10 m, when bearing from W. round N. to S. CAPE GEORGE. 27 and 6 fms., and will VO880I go no further in 4 J nns. at L.W., thward. Should tho it out of the bay into d. Should the wind I wd into Chedabucto e low point of Eddy 3are to give tho ship r, from 16 to 20 fms. *t., of running in tho QLF. lENAC, PRINCE rD STRAIT. of the Gut of Canso, I to the Western Coast I cotia from the Gut of | aso has been alreadj etty good anchorage I bhe Gilt between that! There are but 4 ft. I ., F. and C, about! ^th Jack Shoal, was] ick. The entrance is I is only fit for very I a mile within the| )ut at sea. Cape Jack, and is a I H.W., F. andC.,1 3wman Bank, which I 11 clear it by notj (restward of W.S.W.j ships of any size! 1 leave the Island of| Jph appears 6 or 6 ft. |he island. Outside I lich are dangerous.! ^e, which you must I re is anchorage inl 3oint of the islandl led on the N.E. end| pg a fixed red Lt. Tho Pomquot Banks lie off Pomquet Id. to tho N.N.E., distant from 3 to m. Tho soundings on thorn aro rocky and irregular, tho least water 6 fms., having boon found on tho outer or smaller of tho two banks, w^nn the churoh at Littlo River was shut in behind the east side of tho island, boa ; S.S.W. PoMQXJET Habboub is 1| m. to the westward of Pomquet Id., but of no note I to shipping. ANTIGONISH HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour lies 11 m. S.S.W. I from Cape George. Here small vessels load with timber and gypsum, or plaster, I of which there is an abundance in the neighbourhood, but theliarbour is so shoal I that oven these complete their cargoes outside tho bay, although the anchorage lis not safe. Two beacons, on tho northern point of the entrance, kept in one I bearing W. by N. led over tho bar in 6 ft. at L.W. during the late survey. The I rivers which' fall into this harbour run through many miles of fine land, and the Ipopulation is considerable. Isaac Rock, with only 9 ft. over it, is on a small shoal about 3 cables from the Ishuro ; it is distant 2.^ m. to tho northward of tho entrance of Antigonish, and is ] shown occasionally by heavy breakers. CAPE GEOBOE. — Tho N.W. point of George Bay is a bold headland, {attaining an elevation of GOO ft. above the sea ; tho shallow water only extends quarter of a mile from shore ; there are 20 fms. at double that distance, and tho lead affords but little warning, and great caution is necessary in dark or Ithick weather. Light.— On the north side of tho capo, and in lat. 45" 52' 35', and long. 61° 65' 0*, Lt.-ho, elevated 350 ft. above tho level of H.W., showing a revolving Lt. every lalf minute, visible 26 m. The tower is square, white, and 39 ft. high. Malignant Cove is 10 m. W.S.W. of Capo George; it has a small stream at its lead, and affords good landing for boats. It may be known by the sugar-loaf lill, 680 ft. above the level of the sea, which stands about a mile in the rear of it. Arisaig. — ^The wooden pier at the village of Arisaig is 4 m. west of Malignant Jove ; it only affords shelter for boats and shallops during easterly winds, there joing no shelter with tho wind between W. and N. Nearly a mile to the east- ivard of this pier, and about A a milo N.E. by E. of Arisaig Church, there is a ^remarkable rock, called Frenchman's Bam. MERIGOMISH HARBOUR.— The entrance to this harbour is 14 m. to the Kvestward of the Arisaig, and 27 m. W. ^ S. of Cape George. The coast between p bold, and free from danger, is well settled and cultivated, the land rising a few liles from the shore to tho height of 1 100 ft. in some parts. There are 14 ft. at L.W. over the bar, with sufficient water for large ships kyithin; but its entrance is so intricate, that a pilot is necessary; and as tho northerly winds send in a heavy sea, were a ship to take the ground going in, the would probably bo lost. The bar is formed by rocky shoals running out from the points of the entrance. At present this harbour is seldom frequented by any- thing larger than coasting schooners. It was formerly visited by larger vessels lor timber ; but that article is now exhausted. It is H.W. at 10 h. 6 m. Springs rise 5^ ft., neaps 3^ ft. From the entrance, tho east end of Pictou Id. bears by E. i E., distant 10 m. ; here you may anchor, in moderate weather, in to 6 fms., until you obtain a pilot. Little Harboue is between Merigomish and Pictou Harbours, with Roy Id. before it. This place is of little note, being nearly dry at L.W., excepting the itricate narrow channels. Roy Ledge, of 9 ft., lies off the north shore of Roy Id., listant 85 cables, and ~ of a mile N.W. ^ W. of Colquhoun Pt. This latter point ps a reef running out j a mile to tho eastward, partly dry at L.W. The Roaring Bull is a cliffy point, 4 m. eastward of Pictou Lt.-ho., from which reof of sandstone runs out to the N.E., full 3 cables' length, to 3 fms. PICTOU ISLAND is about 4.i m. long from E. to W., and 1^ m. wide. Its lighest central part towards the oast end is 150 ft. above the sea, and is wooded |n tho northern side ; there are farms and settlements along its southern shore ; }\v cliffs form its outline. The best landing for boats is on the south side, at logor's Pt. ! „ ! i M ' I 28 PIOTOU HARBOUR. Light. — Piotou Id. Lt.-ho. is a sauaro white tower; it stands on the east point of the island, and exhibits a fixed white Lt., elevated 62 ft., visible 12 m. in dear weather. Pioton Id. Reefs extend from each end of the island a considerable distance. The East Reef runs ott from the east point of the island, and is dangerous, being partly dry at L.W. ; it runs out | a mile to 3 fms., and nearly a mile to A fms. This reef should be approached with caution at all times, particularly at night, and on a flood-tide, as there are fms. not far from its N.E. point. The west end of the island may be passed withm | a mile in 3 fms. ; but there are rocks on either side of the west end of the island, nearly dry at L.W., just within the 3 fms. line, extending 3 cables' len^h from the shore, and it shallows the same distance along the north shore; at night, come no nearer the north shore than 8 or 9 fms., or to the south shore than 6 ms. The Middle Shoals are a chain of rocky patches, of 11 ft., running 1^ m., in a W. by S. direction ; they reach from within ^ a mile of the Caribou Channel to withm 1^ m. of the west end of Piotou Id., between which there are about 3^ fms. ; to clear these shoals to the northward in 4 fms., keep Roger's Pt. and west point of Pictou Id. bearing E.S.E. ; large ships should come no nearer than 7 fms. on that side. Mackenzie Hd. is recognised by a sharp-pointed cliff of clay and sandstone 40 ft. high, and by its bearing south from Logan Pt., distant 1} m. ; these points form the entrance to Pictou Bay, which is 1^ m. deep. Mackenzie Shoal is N.E. by E. from the head, J of a mile, and is a rooky bank of 16 ft. Caribou and Doctor's Pt. in one, bearing N. by W., clears it to the eastwcti a cable's length ; and the Lt.-ho. and town point of Piotou in one, bearine w^sh. clears it to the northward, 2 cable's length. The shallow water extends a lull ji mile from Mackenzie Hd. to the northward to 3 fms., and trends to the westward towards the Lt.-ho. ; all that side of the bay being shallow, with ridges of sand drying at L.W. Cole Pt. is a cliff, 30 ft. high, of clay and sandstone, nearly a mile within, or S.W. of Logan Pt. ; it has also a shoal running off to the S.E. ^ of a mile, and diallow water continues oa to the westward as far as Loudon Beach. Logan Pt., likewise, has reefs running off to the E.S.E., | a mile to the 3 fms. line. Pictou light (described hereafter)can be seen on a clear night 12m., and when in one with Cole Pt., bearing W.S.W., clears the reef off the E. end of Pictou Id., I a mile, and also the southern extrem?i'of Pictou Id. Bank, in d| fms. If beating in, tack, when standing to the northyard, the moment the light begins to dis- appear behind Cole Pt. If running in, keep the Lt. W.S.W. i W. till you get soundines in 6 fms., at L.W., off Logan Pt., and follow that depth 1^ m. to the S.W., tiding care not to bring the light to the northward of W. Here you may anchor in the roads till daylight. PIOTOU HABBOXm is in overy respect the finest on the southern shores of the Gulf, capable of containing ships of any burthen; here are coal mines, valuable Quarries of building stone, and a finely settled country in its neighbourhood, ictou has been declared a free warehousmg port, and its trade is very considerable in lumber, coal, and the fishery. The trade of this port appears to be rapidly increasing, and the town of New Glasgow, in the neighbourhood of the coal mines, promises to be of considerable importance. Coasters from all parts of the Gulf resort to Piotou, and its exports have amounted to £100,000 in one season. A steamer runs regularly between Pictou and Quebec ; and there is a regular com- munication by land with Halifax. Light. — ^Pictou Lt.-ho. is an octagonal wooden structure on the S. point of the entrance, painted vertically with red-and-white stripes, exhibiting a fixed white Lt. 65 ft. above the sea, and vis. 12 m. A small fixed red Lt. is shown below the lantern. The branch pilots of Pictou (who are generally active experienced men), are always on the look out for vessels : should you not meet with one, there is good anchorage in Pictou Roads in 5 or 6 fms., with the Lt.-ho. bearing W. Here you might wait for daylight to obtain a pUot. A stranger, particularly in a large ship, should not attempt to cross the bars without one, uthough there is good water on CARIBOU HARBOUR. — OARIB< CHANNJ 0. ids on tho east visible 12 m. in erable distance. ian^erouB, being i mile to A fms. lularly at night, it. fms. ; but there 7 at L.W., just and it shallows r the north shore ining li m., in a ibou Channel to re about 3i fms. ; ;. and west point arer than 7 fms. d sandstone 40 ft. these points form oal is N.E. by B. >ou and Doctor's length; and the ;o the northward, l^ackenzie Hd. to Lt.-ho.; all that 7. a mile within, or , ^ of a mile, and aoh. Logan Ft., IS. line. 12 m., and when mdof Piotould., I fms. If beating ht begins to dia- J W. till you get jpth IJ m. to the Here you may -iuthem shores of |1 iqines, valuable neighbourhood, rory considerable rs to be rabidly j>f the coal mines, (arts of the Gulf one season. A [s a regular com- [e S. point of the \a a fixed white phown below the Bnced men), are le, there is good ; W. Here you 'in a large ship, good water on both. The outer bar has 21 ft. at L.W., bottom u^ mnd ; ort>«sing fhi ifjoa fedl into 4, 5, or 6 fms. for about a mile, when you suddenly shoal agan i8 or 19 ft. on the inner bar ; this bar is also sand, and distant 4 cables' longti >iu the Lt.-ho. and is a cable's length vride ; when across this inner bar, thtf «r r con- tinues deep to the entrance of the harbour. There is very good anohoru^ ' vnon the bars, but it is open to N.E. winds. From the Lt.-ho. to the anohoragi. oli > he easternmost wharves at Pictou, the channel of the harbour is direct, nearly ^ of a mile wide, deep enough for the largest ships, and clear of danger. The Town of Fiotoit stands on the N. side of the harbour, 2 ni. within the Lt.-ho. ; the houses are crowded together along the shores of a small bay, but thoy are hidden, with the exception of the steeples of three churches, from vessels entering the harbour, by Battery Ft., which snelters them from easterly winds; many of the dwelling-houses are of stone, and the population in 1843 upwards of 2000. Opposite the town the harbour expands into three arms, at the heads of which are the Eut, West, and Middle Bivers. The Albion coal mines and New Olasgow are up the East River ; the other two branches are only used by boats. To enter Fictou Harbour with a fair wind, when without Mackenzie Shoal, bring the Lt.-ho. and town point of Pictou in one, bearing 1 or 2 degrees to the northward of W. ; or, which will be the same thing, with Smith Ft., the extreme of the land, on the same side beyond the town. Bun with these marks on, until Logan and Cole Fts. come in one, bearing N.E., when instantly sheer a little to the northward sufficient to bring the town point in one with the N. extreme of the sandy spit. Keep the last-named marks exactly in one, until the Bearing Bull comes in one with Mackenzie Hd. bearing S.E. by E. \ E., when change the course smartly, and run from those marks, keeping the Roaring Bull just in sight, until the N. extreme of Moodie Ft. (the first point on the S. side within the Lt.-ho.) opens out to the northward of the sandy spit ; then haul to the westward, at first towards the S.W. extreme of Loudon Beaon, and afterwards so as to pass midway between it and the sandy spit into the harbour. With a beating wind a pilot is indispensable. It is H.W., F. and C, at the Lt.-ho. at 10 h. ; spring-tides rise 6 ft., neaps 4 ft. With good tides you will carry 4 fms. over the bar. Dootor's Islanb is 1| m. to the northward of Logan Pt., forming two entrances into Caribou Harbour ; the northern one, between two sandy points, is 4 cables' length wide, with only 4 ft. in it at L.W. DoOTOB Beef is very dangerous, stretching out from the point 1| m. to the east- ward, to 3 fms., with rocks dry at L.W. full ^ a mile out. To the southward of this reef, and f of a mile S.E. of Doctor Point lie the Seal Bocks, dry at L.W., and from which the shallow water, forming the bar of Caribou Harbour, extends to Logan Ft., the N. point of Pictou Bay. Caribott Begf, 2 m. to the northward of Doctor Beef, stretches out j a mile N.N.E. from N.E. point of Caribou Id. to the 3 fms. line, is very dangerous, and dries out to the distance of 3 cables from shore ; it consists of large stones, with deep water ve^ near its E. side and N. point. CABIBOIJ HABBOUB is an extensive place, being 6 m. long and a mile wide, but the whole is occupied by shallow water ; and its bar and entrance being too difficult and dangerous to be attempted without a pilot, it is not likely it will ever be much used by shipping. It is H.W. here at 10 h. ; springs rise 6 ft., neaps 4 ft. Light. — On the N.E. part of Caribou Id. a square white Lt.-ho. is erected 26 ft. in height and 35 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a revolving Lt. every minute, vis. 12 m., lat. 46" 46' 0' and long. 62" 40' 20'. CARIBOU CHANNEL is between Pictou Id. Bank and the shoals off Caribou. It has a sufficient depth of water for the largest ships; its breadth in the narrowest part exceeds ^ a mile to the 3 f m. line, or ^ of a nule to the 5 f m. line ; but being crooked, no marks can lead through its whole length. Going to the westward, the safest way is to strike soundings in 6 or 7 fms. on the edge of the shoal off Doctor Id., and follow it to the N.W. until Mackenzie Hd. is just shut in by Logan Ft., bearing S. ^ W. ; then steer from these marks, keeping the head just in, and they will lead across t^'' leep water, and afterwards along uie western edge of the Pictou Id. Bank out to sea. f pi t 80 AMET SOUND. If with an obb-tide and strong S.W. wind, you must koon on tho wonthor sido of tho (ihannol by following thn ndgo of tho shoal water off Doctor Id. further to tho N.W., until Lugun Pt. is only a littlo opon to tho ouHtward of Doctor Pt. ; bnaring S. Tbeso points in one load along tho E. sido of Caribou Hoof, at tho distance of a cablo, in 4 fms. Koep Logan Pt. a littlo opon, and it will load cloar out to sea, in not loss than 4^ fms. Tho samo marks and directions, taken in a reverse order, will enable a ship to take the channel from the northward or westward. Observe, not to haul to tho eastward until tho Hawksbill is well shut in behind Caribou Pt. ; nor opon tho former again after having shut it in, until tho Lt.-ho. at Piotou is opon to tho southward of Cole Pt. From Caribou Pt. to Cape St. John tho course i& N^.W. by W. ^ W., Ifi m. ; tho coast is straight and froe from danger everywhoro to within \ of a milo. This coast is chiefly clifFs of clay and sandstone, soldoiu abovo dO ft. in height, but often much lower ; and in flno weather boats may land all along it. Cape John, tho northern point of tho bay, is composed of sharp-pointed cliffs of sandstone, 40 to fiO ft. high. A roof extends from it to tho N.W., 4 cables' length, on tho inner part of which are two rooks, always abovo water. This reef is steep at its western point, where there aro 7 fms, close to it, being deeper horo than anywhere else. On tho N. sj^lo of tho capo shallow water runs off ^ a milo to 3 fms. ; largo ships should keep in 3i to 4 fms. at L.W. John Bay runs in 4 m. to tho S.E. ; from tho capo to Murphy Pt. it is free from danger, but tho shoal water extending from the shore is often very steep, there- fore come no nearer than 3^ fms. at L.W. Sandy shoals occupy the head of tho bay, drying out | a mile. On tho bar of tho R. John there is only a foot at L.W. Several ships are built hero; and thoy load their cargoes of lumber outside, moored in 2J to 3 fins., mud, and lie safely during tho summer months. On either side of the B. John there are extensive and flourishing settlements. Tho English church will be known by its spiro, and tho Presbyterian chapel by its cupola. AMET SOUND is very extensive, affording excellent anchorage for any number and class of vessels, Tatamagouche Bay being its S.W., and John Bay its eastern arm ; MuUegash Pt. and Cape John its western and eastern points of entrance. Amet Id., situate on the western part of Amet Shoals, is very small, and divided into two parts ; tho western is the largest, presenting clay cliffs on each sido. It is flat at the top, and bare of trees ; it is covered with coarse grass, and about 20 ft. above the sea at H.W. It was formerly much larger than at present ; shallow water extends off this island 300 fms. to tho westward, and will bo cleared in not less than 3:^ fms., if the English steeplo at B. John be not shut in behind tho western side of Cape John ; but large ships should stand in only to 6 fms., and take notice that in every other direction shallow water extends from tho island to a far greater distance. Light. — On tae centre of Amet Island, a square wooden Lt.-ho. is erected, painted white, 32 ft. in height, and 44 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed Lt., vis. 12 m. all round the horizon. •■ The Amet SnoALS are much more extensive and dangerous than have been hitherto represented. They extend nearly 4 milos to tho eastward of the island, and 2 miles to the south-eastward towards Cape John ; in both directions aro rocky patches of 5 or 6 ft., a long mile from the island ; but there is not less than 16 ft. at a greater distance than 2 miles ; there is one patch of that depth full 3 miles to the eastward of the island. Tho marks for this latter patch aro the northern extremes of Amet Id. and Treen Bluff in one, bearing W. i N., and Capo St. John S.W. A S. Waugh Shoal is 1^ milo to the N.W. of Amot Id., and is a rocky dangerous bank. It is nearly 1^ mile long, and i a mile broad, with only 2 fms. at its northern end; the rest 3^ to 6 i ■i''. Do not approach from the northward into less than 7 fms., but in other direct )n3 you may to 5 fms. at L.W. .The only mark for the western sido is the eas-om end of Saddle Id. S.W. | S. The N.E. side is cleared by the western side of Gape John, and th?i English church steeple at the B. John in line bearing S.S.E. ^ E. ) woathor Bldo Id. further to f Doctor Pt. ; 111 Roof, at tho will load clear aB, taken in a northward or ihut in behind til tho Lt.-ho. 7f., 16 m. ; tho a milo. This ight, but often ;)-pointod cliffa f.W., 4 cables' iter. This reef ing deeper hero ins off i ft milo t. it is free from ry steep, thore- tho head of tho ' a foot at L.W. outside, moored cttlemonts. Tho pel by its cupola. for any number Bay its eastern of entrance. 11, and divided 1 each side. It ;ras8, and about an at present; will bo cleared shut in behind only to 6 fms., tends from tho PUaWABH HARBOUR. 81 en ■ected, painted Lt., vis. 12 m. ban have been I of tho island, directions are is not less than that depth full r patch are the liN., and Cape |)cky dangerous to- 2 fms. at its Northward into I.W. .The only S. The N.E. Ichurch steeple TATAMAOOUCHE BAY is 21 miles wide at the rntrnnoo between Mullegash rt. to tho northward and Bruli^ poninsula to tho southward; it runs in 7 miles to t]i(> westward, affording good anchorage ovorywhoro, bottom soft mud ; but largo ships cannot go far up. From 6 fins, at the entrance tho donth decreases to 3 fms. 1 1 milo up tho bay, and to 2 fms. at 4 miles, tho remainacr being all shallow, partly drying at L.W. A rock, with only 7 ft. on it, lies 3i oabloH' li>ngth off the northom shoro, 2 miles within Mullegash Pt. ; Amot Id. and Mullegash Pt. touching, bf iiing E.N.E., clear it to tho southward, distant 120 fms. A stranger may SI I :oly approach to 3 fms. at L.W. ; but in entering, keep well over to tho north- warcl, to avoid tho Bruld Shoals, which extend from Brul5 Pt. 1^ mile to the northward, having only ft. near their outer edge. On the N.E. side, the English church steeple at II. John just open to tho northward of Long Pt., bearing S.E. J E., clears them in 3 fms. The N. and X.W. sides are very steep, but the E. and S.E. sides may bo approached by the lead. Tatamagouche River is in tho S.W. comer of tho bay, 6 m. within the entrance. Several vessels visit this river for lumber every year ; they anchor off it in 11 or 12 ft. at L.W. and ground on soft mud, as the tide falls, without injury. H.W., F. and C, at 10 h. ; spring-tides rise 8 ft., neaps 6 ft. When approaching Tatamagouche Bay from the eastward, between Oape St. John and Amet Id., keep nearest the cape, to avoid tho Amot Shoals, that narrow this channel to about -| of a mile. When coming in to the westward of Amet Id., the passage between Amot Id. and tho Waugh Shoal to the westward is full a mile wide, and from 6 to 10 fms. deep ; the loading mark for running through this passage is Brulii Pt. and Conn's House* in one, oearing S. by W. The western passage into Amet Sound, between Waugh Shoal and Saddle Reef, is a mile wide, with 6 to 8 fms. in it. When bound to John River, or Tatamagouche, pilots may be obtained by makingthe usual signal. Oak Id. is N.W. by W., 10^ m. from Cape John ; it is low and partly wooded, and separated from Pt. Mackenzie by sand-bars, and a gully for boats, which is nearly dry at L.W. Within, to the southward of Oak Id., a bay runs in to the N.W., called Fox Id. Harbour, 3 or 4 m.; it is shallow, and not frequented by shipping. WALLACE HARBOUR is to the southward of Fox Bay, and is the best harbour on the coast, excepting Pictou; there are 16 ft. water on the bar at L.W., spring-tides, and 24 ft. at H.W. ; it is capable of admitting large ships. Tho entrance is W.S.W. ^ W., 2i m. fx'ora Oak Id. ; and between two sandy points, named Palmer and Caulfleld, is 2 cables' length wide, and 6J fms. deep ; above this the channel is crooked and difficult, although it is 160 fms. wide. A pilot is always necessary, and may be obtained by making the usual signal. It is H.W. at Wallace Harbour at 10 h. 30 m., on F. and C. ; spring- tides rise 8 ft., neaps 6 ft., nnd their velocity does not exceed 1^ knot. When approaching Wallace Harbour from the northward, Oak Id. should have a berth given it of nearly a mile ; or keep in from 6 fms., to avoid the reefs off its Aocf- BlflA Cape Cliff is 3i m. N.W. f N. of Oak Id. ; and W.N.W., 9 m. further, is Pugwash Pt. All along this part of the coast there are numerous and flourish- ing farms. PtJQWASH HARBOUR is to the southward of the point, and at the head of the bay of that name; there are 14 ft. at L.W. on the bar, and sufficient water inside for larger vessels than cross the bar. This is a snug little harbour, and the vessels lie in a small land-locked basin to load, where there is plently of water for larg;o ships ; the town and the church are on the east side of the river. The timber trade of this plac : hua much decreased of late years, the stock of timber in the neighbourhood being nearly exhausted, and there are no fisheries here of any consequence; but the settlements in this neighbourhood are increasing. * Conn's white house stands on the southern shore, is 60 ft. above the sea, and the only one that is tvro storica high ; it has a large bam close to it on the east side. It bears S. by W., 1} m. from Brulft Pt. I!i 82 BAT YERTE. The bar is about ^ a mile within the entrance of the bay ; and thenoe, to the harbour, the channel is crooked, and from 50 to 100 fms. wide. A pilot is aJways necessary ; they are able, experienced men, and may be obtained by making the usual signal. It is H.W. at Pugwash, on F. and C. days, at 10 h. 30 m. ; spring-tides rise 7 ft., neaps 4 ft. In the roads it seldom runs a knot, but sometimes in the entrance of the harbour the tides run nearly 2 knots. PtrawASH Beefs surround the point of that name to the distance of | of a mile, and dry f^ a mile out. A stranger, when approaching, should not come within the 5 fms. line, as shown by the chart. In Pugfwash Bead there is ezoelleiit anchorage, in 3 fms. at L.W., sand and clay, well sheltered by Phillip's Beef to the N.W., and Pugwash Beef to the N.E. There is seldom any sea here in the summer, even with northerly winds. To take Pugwash Beads, if without a pilot, being to the northward in 5 fms., you must bring the English church steeple at Pugwash, so as to be seen over, and only just within the west extreme of the low cliff of Fishing Pt., (the east point of tne bay,^ bearing S. by E. | E. ; running with these marks you must not open the church in the least to the westward of the point until the south point of Phillip Biver (Bergamen Pt.) bears S.W. by W., or until the water decreases to 3| fms., you will then be close to the N.W. end of the Pugwash Beef ; now change your course to S.S.W., | of a mile, when you may anchor in 16 or 18 ft. at L.W., with Fishing Pt. E. by S. ^ S., distant about | a mile, or you may lie in 14 ft., I a mile farthe r to t he southward. PHILLIP BIVER.— Lewis Hd. is 2 m. to the westward of Pugwash Hd., and is the north point of the entrance to Phillip River. Lewis Reefs run off to the N.E., 2| m. from the head, as shown by the chart, and are extremely dangerous for strangers to approach. The inner part of this reef is shallow, having only 6 ft. on it at tho d'stance of 1| m. from the shore ; but on the outer part there are from 15 to 18 ft. on rocky patches, with deeper water between. Phillip River has a dangerous bar of stones and sand, having only a narrow, crooked channel of 8 ft. at L.W. This river is not used as a loading port ; but boats can go up 9 m. The new vessels built here are brought down to Pugwash to load ; and the lumber is likewise taken to Pugwash to be shipped. There are increasing settlements along the borders of this river. BAY VEBTB.— Cold Spring Hd. is N.N.W., 8 m. from Lewis Hd. Vessels bound up the Bay Verte, may run along between the latter heads in 6^ to 7 fms. The Bay Verte is 9 miles wide across the entrance from Cold Spring Hd. to Lidian Hd., in Xew Brunswick ; it is^ about 11 miles deep, and 2| miles m breadth near its head, where the two provinces of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick separate. The head of the bay is very shallow some distance from the shore. In the entrance to this bay are some shoals, which should be carefully avoided when navigating this part of the strait; these are the Aggermore Rk.,*Laurent Shoal, Heart Shoal, and Spear Shoal. The Aggermore Bock, with only 18 ft. on it, is N.E. | E., 2| miles from Cold Spring Hd., having a deep-water channel between ; but in a N.N.W. direction towards Cape St. Laurent, not more than 3^ fms. will be found at L.W., and in some places less. Laurent Shoal, with 16 ft. least water on it, is of sand and rock, about | of a mile long, and ^ a mile broad. S'rom the shoalest part Cape St. Laurent bears N.W. by N., 2f mUes; Cold Spring Hd., S.S.W. ^W.; and Indian Pt., N.E. by E. ^ E. There are i\ fms. close to the eastern side of this shoal. Heart Shoal is S.W. by S., 1 j mile from Cape Spear ; the least water on it is 6 ft., with 2^ fms. between it and the shore, as will be seen by the chart. Spear Shoal is about a mile E.S.E. from Heart Shoal ; it has a patch of rock of only 10 ft. near its east end, with 15 to 18 ft. on other parts; it is a bank of stones and sand, about a mile long from E. to W. , and ^ of a nule broad. In approaching this shoal from the eastward the lead gives little warning, there being4 to 4| fms. very near it. From the shoal part of the bank Indian Pt. bears N.NIE., 2^ miles, and Gape Spear N.W. by N., 1§ mile. enoe, to the lot is always - making the ides rise 7 it., le entrance of ){ I of a mile, come within 3 is exoelleiit illip's Reef to a here in the i^ard in 5 fms., > be seen over, Pt., (the east s you must not , south point of er decreases to ef; now change 18 ft. at L.Wm ly lie in 14 ft. > cfwash Hd., and fs run off to the jmely dangerous m, having only er paxt there are -only a narrow, ading port; but vm to Pugwash >pea. There are rig Hd. Vessels J in 6i to 7 fms. gHd. to Indian In breadth near iswick separate. In the entrance rhen navigating »al, HeartShoal, I miles from Cold Sf.N.W. direction latIi.W.,»ttdin lock, about | of a kt. Laurent bears Indian Pt., N.B. ast water on it is he chart. \ patch of rock of J a bank of stones I In approaching lbeing4to4|fms. "-T.nIe., 2i miles, OAPE TOBlfENTINE. 88 Boss Spit is 3^ miles N.W. by N. of Cold Spring Pt.; it dries full | of a mile from the shore, and is dangerous, as its outer edge is steep-to, there being 17 ft. close to its point ; you shomd keep in 3^ fms. when passing this spit. Tignish Head is 4^ miles north-westward of Boss Spit ; there are no dangers between, the water shoaling gradually, imtil you arrive off the head, where there are two shallow patches of 5 to 6 ft., all stones, N.X.E. i E. from the head, | of a mile. Tignish Biver is the principal stream in the Bay Yerte, and has only 3 ft. at L.W., it is both narrow and crooked, and unfit for. shipping ; but it is frequented by schooners. About 5 miles up the river there are saw mills, where large quantities of deal are cut, which are sent down by small craft to Pugwash to be shipped for the British market ; in the summer they are sometimes sent along shore in rafts. Spring-tides rise 9 ft., neaps 5 ft. From here it was proposed to cut a canal to Cumberland Fort, Bay of Fundy. Gaspereaux Biver is on the northern side, near the head of the bay, on the southern shore of which stands Fort li'onckton, on Old Ford Pt., now washed by the sea. The Bay Yerte is rising considerably in importance in consequence of its proximity to the Bay of Ftmdy ; and the interior is in a highly improving state, with an increasing population. There are thriving settlements on both sides of the bay, particularly near its head, where large tracts of meadow land have been formed by embanking out the tide. Yessels bound up the Bay Yerte should keep the Nova Scotia coast onboard, running up in 6f and 7 fms. until they arrive off Cold Spring Hd., where, at the distance of about 1| mile from the shore, they will find the water deepen to 8 or 9, and even nearly to 10 fms., as they pass to the southward of the bamks and shoals which have been described. After passing Cold Spring Head about 3 miles, the depth decreases to less than 5 fms., and continues to shoal gradually, with mud and sand bottom, to the head of the bay. A reference to the chart i^ill show the general extent of the shoal water off the shore. Yessels should be careful not to go into less water than 3^ fms. until they are past Boss Spit. Farther up the bay there is nothing in the way, excepting two patches of stone already noticed. CAPE TORMENTINE is the great headland which forms the eastern extremity of New Brunswick within the Gulf. Indian Pt. may be said to form the southern, and Gape Jourimain the northern points of this headland ; they are nearly N. and S. of each other, distant 4^ miles. This promontory is surrounded by dangerous and extensive shoals. The Tormentine Eeefs are rendered very dangerous by the strong tides in their vicinity. From Indian Pt. they run off E.S.E. full 3 miles, and foul ground runs off a mile farther to 4 fms. ; a small part of this reef dries at L.W. ; this bears E.S.E. i E., 2| miles from Indian Point. These reefs should at all times be approached with caution by the lead, and, particularly with light winds, not nearer than 9 fms., when to the north-eastward of them, as the flood-tide sets over them to the southward, into Bay Yerte, at the rate of 3 knots, which causes a great rippling over the part that dries. There is another patch of 6 ft. at L.W., a mile within this, in the direction of the point ; small vessels pass between the latter patch and Iiidian Pt., in 2^ fms. at L.W., and often anchor tmder the point with northerly winds. To run through the 2J fm. channel, between Indian Pt. and the dry part of the Tormentine Reefs, bring Indian Pt. and Cape Spear in one, bearing W.S.W. J W., and run towards them, imtil the eastern extreme of Cape Tormentine touches the western side of the Outer Cape Jourimain Id. N. by W., then run out to the S. by E. with the last-named marks astern, until the water deepens to 5 fms. at L.W. ; you will then be to the southward of the reefs. Cafe JoxmiMAiir is the northern point of the Jourimain Ids. ; and to vessels running through the strait it forms the extreme point of land either firom the westward or eastward. The Jourimain Shoals are very dangerous to vessels in the night, and the lead should always be kept going when approaching them in dark weather; and when to the eastward of them, come no nearer than 9 fms., but to [G. & E. St. Lawkenob.] f nm .111 I; rH|| ! i I i I ! 84 BHEDIAC BAY. — COCAGNE HARBOUR. the westward they may be approached within 7 or 6 fms. From the cape shoal water extends N. by W., IJ mile, and from thence it extends 4 J miles to the S.E. J S. ; near this point of the shoal is a patch of only 6 ft. at L.W., as shown by the chart; this is IJ mile from the shore, and is very dangerous, being bold-to on the eastern side. To the westward of the cape the shoal water extends full 4 miles, and runs off 2 miles from the shore ; but you may approach this part to 6 or 6 fms. Light. — An octagonal white Lt.-ho. is erected on Jourimain Island, 40 ft. in height, and 70 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed white light, vis. 14 miles. It stands 60 ft. from the extremity of the clif^ in lat. 46° 10' 0', and long. 63° 50' 0'. The keeper's dwelling is 60 ft. westward of the Lt.-ho., and is also painted white. Cape Bruin is N.W. by W. ^ W., 6 J miles from Cape Jourimain. Cape Bald is a sandstone cliff, 40 ft. high, 12 miles N.W. f W. of Cape Bruin ; between there is food anchorage in 6 fms., muddy bottom, off the mouths of the Great and Little hemogue R. ; these rivers are only fit for boats. You may safely approach this Eart of the coast at night to 6 fms. Bouleaux Pt. is W.N.W., 7 miles from Cape laid ; off the former point shoal water runs off a full mile. ChSne Pt. is 4^ miles to the W.N.W. of Bouleaux Pt., and is the point whereon the light of She^ac is exhibited. SHEDIAO BAY.— Shediac Point is N.N.W., 6i miles from Bouleaux Point, between which is Shediac Bay, 5 miles deep ; on the western side of the bay is Shediac Id., about 2 miles in length. Shediac Village is on the western shore, about W. by S. from the southern end of the island, and there is a narrow channel within the^sland for vessels of 7 or 8 ft. The harbour is between the S.W. point of Sliediac Id. and Pt. Chfine, the latter bearing from the former S.S.E., f of a mile. From Pt. Chdne a bar runs out to the northward f of a mile, and nearly all dries, which makes the harbour more secure. Near the middle of the bay, which is all shallow, there are two rocks, of 6 and 9 ft., E.S.E. from the centre of Shediac Id. The easternmost^ called Medea Rk,, is 2 miles from the island ; the western rock is called Zephyr Rk., and is nearly midway between Media Rk. and the Id., and a full mile to the westward of the former; between the Zephyr Rk. and the shallows running off a short distance from the island, is the passage into the harbour. Light. — On Chfine Wharf is a fixed Lt., from a lantern o: . a pole, elevated 15 ft., and vis. 6 m. It is only shown in the summer season. Shediao is not a place of much trade ; a few cargoes of deals are shipped here. Strangers bound to this place should take a pilot. By making the usual signal, the harbour-master, or a pilot will attend. The depth that can be carried in by a good pilot is 14 ft. at L.W., and 18 ft. on spring-tides. In the space where the | shipping is moored, are 12 to 17 ft. at L.W., mud; it is about J of a mile long, and from 1| to 3 cables' length wide. The Shediac and Schoudouc are very small I rivers, only navigable for Ijoato a few miles to the saw mills. Spring-tides rise | 4ft., neaps about 2 ft. Shediac Bay ought not to be entered by largQ vessels, as there are little more I than 3 fms. in it, and it is rendered dangerous by the Medea and Zephyr Rks. ; the shoal water extends full 2 m. from Shediac Pt. Between Cape Bald and Cocagne | Hd., 5 fms. is near enough for a large ship to approach this part of the coast. COCAGNE HARBOUR.— Renouard Pt. is 1^ m. N.W. by W. of Cocagne Hd.,1 and forms the southern point of the entrance to this harbour ; as the S. point of I Cocagne Id. does the northern point. It is a very small harbour ; the channel I over the bar of sand and gravel is narrow and crooked, with 10ft. at L.W., and! 14 ft. at H. W. , spring- tides ; within the bar the]|water deepens for a short distance, I where a few vessels load lumber. To enter this harbour, a good pilot and fine I weather are absolutely necessary. The shores of this bay and river are all well j settled. From the entrance of Cocagne R. to the N. point of Buctouche Sand Bar, I the course is N. ^ E,, 5^ m. The North Patch, of only 12 ft., must be carefullyj avoided when approaching Buctouche Roads from the northward ; it has 5 fms. I I^UCTOUCHE ROADS. — RICHIBUCTO. 85 nn the cape shoal 8 4^ miles to the at L.W., as shown ■ous, being bold-to ■water extends full proach this part to tin Island, 40 ft. in b, vis. 14 miles. It ndlong. eS-SO'O'. also painted white, aain. Cape Bald is n ; between there is le Great and Little safely approach this „ 7 miles from Cape 8 the point whereon om Bouleaux Point, n side of the bay is I the western shore, I is a narrow channel ween the S.W. point brmer S.S.E., iof a of a mile, and nearly I middle of the bay, E. from the centre of from the island ; the wreen Media Rk. and peen the Zephyr Ek. ' is the passage into I pole, elevated 15 ft., |als are shipped here. Ing the usual signal, can be carried in by the space where the j ►ut I of a mile long, idouc are very small Spring-tides rise Ithere are little more Ind Zephyr Eks. ; the Le Bald and Cocagne lart of the coast. Iw. of Cocagne Hd., Ir; as the S. point of Irbour ; the channel i 10 ft. atL.W., and [for a short distance, I , good pilot and fine nd river are all well Ictouche Sand Bar, I must be carefully I Iward; it has 6fms.| just outside of it. It lies on the N.E. part of the outer bar of Buctouohe, and 2 m. off the shore, with Cocagne steeple and the N.W. extreme of Cocagne Id. in one, bearing S.S.W. | W., and the S. end of Buctouohe Sand Bar S.W. by W. ; by keeping in 5 fms. you will pass outside of it. The outer bar is a long ridge of sandy and rooky ground, with 2f to 2| fms. on it ; it extends from the North Patch, nearly parallel with the shore, almost to Cocagne, a distance of 7 m. There is a narrow channel of deep water within it, having 5 to 6 fms. good ground. BUCTOUOHE ROADS.— Vessels of too large a draught of water to enter the river. __ , lie moored in the roads to take in their cargoes ; this is just within the outer bar, and is perfectly safe for vessels with good ground taclde, the ground being stiff clay, and sheltered by the outer bar horn any heavy sea. When ap- proaching this anchorage there is nothing in the way of vessels that do not draw too much water to cross the outer bar, except the North Patch, before mentioned. The marks for anchoring in the roads are, the two white beacons (placed on the S. side of the entrance of the river) in one, bearing N.W. by W. i W. ; Buotoucho steeple just open to the westward of a small sandy islet that forms the S.W. point of Buctouohe Sand Bar ; Cocagne steeple will then be open its own breadth to the eastward of Dickson Pt. (: mall peninsula point about 2^ m. to the southward of the sand-bar) ; hero von will have 4 fms. good ground. To enter the river the assistance of a pilot is ..usolutely necessary, as the channel is narrow and intricate. Several vessels visit this port for lumber, and the banks of the river are well settled. A large ship will, when boimd to Buotouche Roads, find the best water in not less than 3| fms., by coming in to the northward of the North Patch, and running to the southward in the channel within the outer bar. To clear the North Patch run in with Buctouche steeple to the southward of W., and you will, if the weather be clear, see Cocagne steeple open to the westward of Cocagne Id., and seen between the latter and the mainland ; you must continue this course until the steeple comes on with Dickson Pt. ; then immediately change your course, running with Dickson Pt. and Cocagne steeple in one, bearing S.S.W. i W., and they w^l lead close inside the outer bar, and clear of a small shoal between it and the shore, with not less than 2| fms. on it. Take care not to shut the steeple in behind Dickson Pt. as you run along the sand-bar, and as soon as Buctouche steeple opens to the westward of the small sandy islet which forms the S.W. point of Buctouche Sand Bar, anchor as before with the beacons in one. From the S.E. point of Buctouche Sand Bar to Richibucto Hd., which is composed of sandstone and clay cliffs, 50 ft. high, and where the Lt.-ho. is built, the course is N. | E., 18^ m. ; and this part of the coast is clean, and may be approached by the lead ; but between Richibucto Hd. and Richibucto R., a reef of sandstone runs off nearly a mile from H.W. mark. Light. — On Richibucto Hd., a white wooden square tower is erected 50 ft. in height, and 70 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed Lt., vis. 14 m. Lat. 46° 39* 40' and long. 64° 42' 30'. BIGHIBUOTO. — The Richibucto R. is next in importance to Miramiohi on this part of the coast, both to its depth on the bar, and to the distance which it is I navigable. It is visited by a considerable number of vessels for cargoes of timber. On its banks there are flourishing and rapidly-increasing settlements. The town of Liverpool stands about 3 m. within the entrance, on the N. side of the river. The entrance of the Richibucto is nearly 360 fms. wide ; between two sand-bars, I several miles in length, called the North and South Beaches, on which there are sand-hills 30 ft. high. Any vessel that can pass the bar may be taken 13 m. up the river ; small vessels can go up nearly 20 m. The pilots of Richibucto keep a good look-out for vessels from the beacons at the mouth of the river, and are intelligent attentive men ; their assistance is absolutely necessary, as the bar of I Richibucto is extremely dangerous, being subject to changes from the effects of heavy gales. The situation of the narrow channel over the bar, 1 |in. S.S.E. from Ithu river's mouth, is indicated by two white beacons on tho M. beach, and a large I black buoy moored off it, in 4 fms. at L.W., with the two beacons in one, distant I about a mile. The N. beacon, which stands on a sand-hill 30 ft. high, at the 86 KOUCHIBOUGUAC BIVEB. S. extremity of the N. beach, is white, and large ; it is intended to point out the situation of the river to vessels out at sea. The bar must always be crossed with the two beacons in one ; the depth on the bar is 11 ft. at L.W., and 15 ft. at H.W., and is reported to be deepening ; ordinary spring-tides rise 4ft., neaps 2^ ft. When running in with the beacons in one, as soon as you bring the S.W. point of the North Beach to bear N. W., steer for it : the channel, which is only 50 fms. wide, passes close to the North Beach at the N. beacon ; when opposite this beacon, keep away W.S.W. for ^ a mile, when you m^ anchor in a secure harbour. From Bichibucto Hd. to Sapin Pt. the course is N. by E., distant 19 m. across Kouchibouguac Bay, the shores of which are very low, with sand-bars and beacheb, inclosing lagoons, through which rivers flow into the sea. KouoHiBOTTQUAC RiVEB enters the sea about 9 m. N. by W. | W. of Bichibucto Bar ; this river has a bar of sand, which frequently shifts ; there are 9 ft. on the bar at spring-tides, which rise from 2| to 4 ft., and flow 8 m. up the river. Large ships are sometimes built here, and towed by a steamer to Miramichi, or Bichibucto, to be fitted and loaded. The banks of this river are well settled. In all the northern part of Kouchibouguac Bay, the shoal water (that is to 3 fms.) extends to some distance ofiF shore, till it joins the Sapin Ledge. The Sapin Ledge, directly off the point of that name, is very dangerous, having only 12 ft. on it, and right in the track of large ships running along the shore ; at night you should not come nearer to it than 9 fms., as there are o fms. within 2 cables' length of its eastern side. The ledge is 1^ m. long from E. to W., and jl amile broad ; from its outer edge Escumenao Lt.-ho. bears N. ^ E., distant 6 m., and E.S.E., 2 m. from Sapin Pt., having 3^ fms. in the channel between them. liight. — Point Escumenao is N.N.E. | E., 5|m. from Sapin Pt. ; between is a very low and shallow shore. Escumenao Pt, is low, and wooded with spruce trees ; but is now rendered reo^arkable by the conspicuous white Lt.-ho., showing a fixed Lt., 70 ft. above H.W., vis. 14 m., and serves to warn vessels of their approach to the reef, which iruns off more than 2^ m. N.E. from the point. PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND. This island is 102 m. long, and 30 m. broad towards its east end; but near the west end it is almost divided into two parts. It is well settled and possesses a good soil, fit for all general purposes. The climate is commonly healthy and temperate, and not subject to such frequent and heavy fogs as Newfoundland and the adjacent coasts of Breton and New Brunswick generally are, nor yet to the sudden changes of weather experienced in England. The winter sets in here about the middle of December and continues until April, during which period it is colder than in England ; usually a steady frost, with frequent snow- falls, but not so severe as to prevent the exertions of the inhabitants in their various emplojmients. The weather is commonly serene, and the sky clear. In April the ice breaks up, and the spring opens. In May the face of the country presents a delightful aspect, and afford a striking contrast to the surrounding shores. The first appearance of the island is like that of a forest emerging from the sea; the red cliffs, which are not very high, then appear; the lands are covered with lofty trees, and the sand-hills on the northern side of the island are covered with verdure. Vegetation is so exceedingly quick, that in July peas are gathered which were sown in the preceding month. The country is generally level, the highest ridges not exceeding 400 to 500 ft., but genersdly much lower, especially near the coast, and abounds with springs of fine water, and groves of trees, which produce great quantities of excellent timber. The greater part of the I inhabitants are employed in farming and fishing. What is most important to seamen, is the rare occurrence of fogs in the Northumberland Strait, which are so embarrassing in other parts of the Gulf. The prevailing S.W. wind in summer, EAST POINT. CARDIGAN BAY. 87 d to point out the ; the depth on the lepening ; ordinary ;ho beacons in one, jarN.W., steer for North Beach at the J a nule, when you listant 19 m. across i-bars and beacheb, 1 "W. of Eichibucto here are 9 ft. on the p the river. Large ttichi, or Eichibucto, settled. In all the 18 to 3 fms.) extends Y dangerous, having along the shore ; at jre are 5 fms. within from E. to W., and r. i E., distant 6 m., lel between them, rin Ft. ; between is a wooded with spruce [lite Lt.-ho., showing I warn vessels of their Dm the point. D. , east end; but near lettled and possesses amonly healthy and js as Newfoundland lerally are, nor yet The winter sets .ipril, during which I with frequent snow- inhabitants in their Id the sky clear. In face of the country to the surrounding jrest emerging from [)ear ; the lands are |ide of the island are iat in July peas are jountry is generally lerally much lower, rater, and groves of I greater part of the m.ost important to id Strait, which are '. wind in summer, accompanied by thick fogs in the Bay of Fundy, parts with its moistnre in passing over the heated land of Nova Scotia, and becomes a hot dry wind off its northern coast. Charlotte Town, situate between York and Hillsborough Eivevs, on the southern side of the island, is the seat of government. The coast forms numerous harbours, many of which are, however, fit for small vessels only. The principal loading ports at present are on the eastern side, Cardigan Bay, or the Three Eivers and Murrav Harbour ; on the S.E., Hills- borough Bay, and Eiver ; and Bedeque Bay on the southern side ; and Bichmond Bay and Holland Harbour on the northern side. BAST POINT, in Iat. 46» 27' 15', and long. 61» 57' 68', is a cliff 60 to 60 ft. high, composed of red sandstone. A reef runs off the point nearly a mile, to 5 fms., and | of that distance to 3 fms. This reef should be approached with great caution, as the flood-tide sets strongly over it from the northward, and from thence to the south-westward, at the rate of 2| knots. This tide frequently causes great ripplings off the point, and a large ship at night, or in dark weather, should not stand nearer than the depth of 20 fms. The sea is very heavy off this point in N.E. gales. To the southward of the point, between it and East Lake Outlet, there is good riding with northerly winds. Light. — On East Point an octagonal wooden Lt.-ho., painted white, is erected about 200 yards inshore from the south side of the point, 60 ft. in height and 130 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed Lt., visible 18 m. Milne Bank is S.E. of the Cape about 3 m.; it runs N.N.E. and S.S.E., 5f m. in length, and 1| in breadth, with 4| to 8 fms. on it; the shtdlowest part of the bank is between S. by E. and S. i W. from East Pt., 4 J to 5f m. Harvey Reef extends 4 cables from Harvey Pt., and has on it the Shallop Bk. which always shows. Harvey Cove is just to the westward of Harvey Pt. To the W. and S.W. of Harvey Cove are Colville River, Rollo Bay, leading to Fortune River; and Howe Bay leading to Little River; these are all tidal inlets, obstructed by sand-bars, having not more than 3 to 5 ft. over them at L.W. Of these, Colville River is the only place of any note, and here the trade of the eastern part of the island is principally shipped. In the bay there is good anchorage, with off-shore winds. Several reefs extend from the points of sand- stone cliffs which separate these bays, but they are out of the way of vessels down the coast. Broughton River is the next place to the southward, and has a dangerous bar of 6 ft., 1 m. from its entrance. This narrow channel is marked by 8 buo3n3. Inside the entrance the inlet widens, and the channels are marked out by stakes. Foiu- miles south of the bar is Broughton Id., forming the north side of Cardigan Bay. Off the eastern side of the island, Broughton ledge extends 6 cables, with rocks at its extremity. The south extreme of the island is a red sandstone cliff 30 ft. high, with a rock off, which dries, and shallow water outside. PAimuRE Island forms the south side of the entrance to Cardigan Bay, and is about 2 m. long, by 1 broad; and like Broughton Id., it is joined to the land by a narrow sand-bar, always above water. Panmure ledge runs out 6 cables fron: Panmure Hd. to the depth of 3 fms. CABDIOAN BAY, or the THREE RIVERS, is between Broughton Id. and Panmure Id. ; it is the common entrance to three rivers, viz. : Cardigan River, Brudenell River, and Montague River. George Town stands on a peninsula between the Rivers Brudenell and Cardigan. In these places many large ships have loaded with timber. There is anchorage without in Cardigan Bay, in from 10 to 6 fms., where a pilot must be obtained. The channel leading to George Town is narrow, but depth sufficient for large ships, there being 6 fms. off the town ; the entrance is marked by three buoys ; a red and black buoy are placed on the starboard or north side of the channel and a white buoy on the port or south side. It is H.W. at 8h. 40 m. Springs rise 5 ft., neaps 3 ft. Light. — On Panmure Hd., on the east extreme of Panmure Id., is a fixed white Lt., 89 ft. above H.W., and visible 14 m. The building is wood, painted white. Panmure Shoal and Spit.— The shoal extends f of a mile off the north shore of 38 MUBBAY HABBOUB. ■ i the island, and the spit forms the woatem side of the shoal, and is dry at L.W., whore the white buov is placed. FISHERMAN'S BANK is 3 uj. long, E. and W., and IJ m. broad; in the centre part are only 4 to 5 fms, ; this bears from Cape Bear, the nearest land, E.S.E., 7| m. It has deep water all round it. In a gale, this bank should be avoided by large ships. MURRAY HARBOUR is close to the north-westward of Cape Bear ; and the entrance is narrow and shoal, and difficult of access, but small ships have frequently loaded here. Vessels coming from the eastward, and bound to Murray Harbour, must avoid approaching too near to Cape Bear, as a ridge of rocks stretches out a fall mile from it. The bar of Murray Harbour is exceedingly dangerous, having only 10 ft. at L.W. ; and easterly winds send in such a heavy sea, that breaKers extend all across the bay, upwards of 2 j m. The channel in is buoyed and beaconed, but a pilot is at all times necessary to ensure saf etjr. The mark to run in by is the white beacon (on the south point of entrance) in line with the black btdl on the white gable of the Transit Bam, bearing W. by S. ^ S., until within 2 cables of the beacon, then haul a little to the northward, and pass Old Store Pt. at I cable distance, and anchor within it. It is H.W. at Murray Harbour, F. and C, at 9 h. 6 m. Springs rise 6,^ ft., neaps 3|. From Cape Bear to Wood Id. to the westward, the coast is all clear ; and near the shore is anchorage in 3 to 4 fms. Cape Bear Reef runs out to the eastward from the cape ^ of a mile to 3 fms. and a mile to 5 fms., and is composed of large stones. Panmure Hd. and Terras Pt. in one N. I E., clears it 1 mile on the east side. At night Panmure Lt. must be kept open of Terras Pt. Guernsey Pt. kept well open S. of Blackwood Pt. leads to the southward. Wood Islands are 13 m. to the, westward of Cape Bear; they are inhabited, and only in parts covered with wood, and connected with the main by a narrow sand bar ; they are about 50 ft. high. With N.W. wi:\ds you may anchor to the eastward of these islands, in from 3 to 9 fms. The space between the islets and the shore forms a good boat harbour ; the entrance is from the eastward, but nearly dry at L.W. Indian Rocks are about v mile S.W.'by W. from Wood Id., running thence to the westward about 1^ m., and ^ a mile in breadth; their southern side is about 1| m. ofif shore. There is almost always a rippling on those parts which dry, or they would be very dangerous by day as well as by night. Spring-tides run 3 raiots near these rocks, and rise 6 ft., and it is H.W., F. and C., at 9h. 45 m. At night come no nearer the S.E. part than 13 fms., as there are 10 ims, within ^ of a mile of the southern edge. There is a narrow channel between these rocks and the shore, but of no use to shipping. Rifleman Rocks, 4^m. to the westward of Indian Rks., are one of the greatest dangers in the strait. There are only 5 ft. on the shoalest part, and from its outer point, in 3 fms.. Prim Pt. Lt. bears N.N.W., 8 m. This shojd should always be approached with great care, particularly in foggy VeatKor, as the soundings are very irregular ; there are 16 fms. within | a mile of it, and a less depth farther out. At night the Prim Lt. should not be brought to the westward of N.by W. ^ W. Pinnette Harbour is 4 m. eastward of Prim Pt. ; it has a rocky dangerous bar, and is only fit for small schooners ; the bar is nearly a mile without the entrance, and the shoals run off a mile farther. These shoals are dangerous, and should not be approached nearer than 6 fms. at Ij.W. At Pinnette it is H.W., F. and C, at 10 h. ; springs rise 8 ft., neaps 5 ft. There are only 2 ft. on the bar at L.W. Lights PRIM POINT is low, with cliffs 10 to 15 ft. high. The Lt.-ho. shows a fixed Lt. 68 ft. above the level of the sea at H.W., and may be seen 12 or 15 m. from the deck, and is of great service to vessels coming from the eastward, in guiding them clear of the Pinnette and Rifleman Shoals, and enabling them to enter Hillsborough Bay in the night. The Lt.-ho. stands 100 yards within the Point. The W. extreme of St. Peter's Id. bears from it N.W. by N., 7| m. ; and the W. end of Governor's Id. N. by E. ^ E., 6 m. HILLSBOROUGH BAY. 89 is dry at L.W., . broad ; in the le nearest land, bank should be 9 Bear ; and the a all ships have and bound to 3ar, as a ridge of ag only 10 ft. at takers extend all id beaconed, but run in by is the black ball on the within 2 cables of ore Pt. at i cable J rise 6.i ft., neaps is all clear; and mile to 3 f ms. and and Terras Pt. in nure Lt. must be ickwood Pt. leads ire inhabited, and by a narrow sand or to the eastward nd the shore forms irly dry at L. W. inning thence to .em side is about irts which dry, or Spring-tides run 10., at 9h. 45 m. ire 10 fms. within tween these rocks At Blookhottse Pt., W. side of entrance to Charlotte Town Harbour, a small fixed harbour Lt., 35 ft. high, is shown m11 night, and vis. 9 m. Prim Point Reef runs out to the westward from the point, with uneven soundings, and is of a forked shape. Its western point iu 4;^ fms., bears W.N.W., 2^ m. from the Lt>-ho. ; but to the depth of 5 fms. it extends out nearly 3 m. The marks to clear the extreme end in the latter depth are, the Blockhouse Pt. and the square tower of the Presbyterian Church at Charlotte Town in one, bearing N.N.E. As these objects cannot always be seen, you must attend to the lead, and may safely round the reef by it and the bearing of the Lt.-ho., in 3, 4, or 5 fms., according to your vessel's draught of water. St. Peter's Island, on the N.W. side of Hillsborough Bay, is about d m. in cir- cumference ; it is of moderate height, and its centre thickly wooded ; there are settlers on each side. You may approach the S. side of the island within a mile ; but there are extensive shoals running off to the eastward from the island, in an E. by IJ. direction, 3 m. ; this spit dries 2 m. from the island. Off the end of the spit is the Cpit Hd., a rocky shoal of 8 ft. Close to the eastward of the spit, the Spit Hd. buoy, sturmounted by a beacon, is moored it lies in the channel in 5 fms., with the W. end of the Government-house in one with Battery Pt., N. ^ E. ; and the N. side of St. Peter's Id., W. j S. The western side of the channel trends N., 2 J m. from the Spit Hd. buoy to the Blockhouse Pt., at the entrance of Charlotte Town Harbour. About ^ a mile S. by W. j W. of Blockhouse Pt. is the Trout Rk., of 7 ft., having 14 to 16 ft. around it. Government House and Blockhouse Pt. in one, N. by E. ;| E., just clears its E. side. Governor Island is E. by S., 4^ m. from St. Peter's Id., and S. by E. ^ E., 4 m. from Blockhouse Pt. It is low, partly wooded, and surrounded by shoals to some distance off. This island is near the centre of the bay, and forms with its shoals the eastern side of the entrance of the channel to Charlotte Town Harbour, as well as the western side of the channel leading to Orwell and Pownell Bays. The Governor Shoals extend to the S.W. from the island, and have some shallow patches a considerable distance from the island ; to the westward these shoals run off nearly 2 m., to 5 fms. The Fitzroy buoy is in 4 fms., a cable's length within the end of the shoal ; it lies with Battery Pfc. and the square tower of the Presby- terian Church in one, N. by E. 5 E. You may pass on either side of this buoy ; but very large ships should pass to the westward of it. The Squaw Shoal of 10 ft. is 2 m. N. by W. from the N.W. part of Governor Id., and must also be passed to the westward. Huntly Rk., of 12 ft., is B. by W. i W., 1 J m. from the W. end of the island, and must be passed to the westward when going to Charlotte Town. HILLSBOBOITOH BAY is the finest bay in the island; within it is the prin- cipal harbour and capital town of Charlotte Town, which is advantageously situated on the northern bank of th ^ Hillsborough, where the deep water approaches nearest to the shore. All kinds of supplies may be obtained here, and there is sufficient water in the harbour for the largest ships ; and the Hillsborough R. is navigable for large ships 7 or 8 m. above Charlotte Town ; smaller vessels may go farther up ; the shores are all well settled. It is H.W., F. and C, at 10 h. 45 m. ; spring-tides rise 9i ft., neaps 7 ft. Ships generally lie off the wharves of the town, where the channel is nearly 10 fms. deep, and 280 fms. wide. Strangers, or those unacquainted, when bound to Charlotte Town, should tal a pilot ; but in the event of not meeting one outside, the bay may be safely entered, and good anchorage will be found N.W. of Governor Id., until a pilot can be obtained. When enterin;;; the bay from the westward the leading mark is Pow- nell's Pt., just touching the N. point of Governor Id., bearing E. by N. ; run in with this mark, until you see the Presbyterian Church, and as soon as it is in one Avith Block-house Pt., N. byE. | E., steer N.E. by E., r- N.E. ^ E., according to the tide, until the W. side of JGovemment-house and Battery Pt. come in one ; these latter marks lead up the deep-water channel to Trout Pt., at the entrance of the harbour. If you cannot see the leading marks keep along the soiithem .in Kildaru. It may be also known by somo very remarkable high sand-hill , l\^ miles to tho southward of its entrance, as thuro are no high sand-bills to tho luirthward of the harbour. It has two sand-bars, wi^h 10 ft. on them at L.W. The entrance is 180 fms. wide. Tho outer bar of sand is U mile out from tho entrance ; tho channel across it is narrow, and is indicated by a white boaoon (on tho southern extreme of tho northern sand-bar) in ono with a white mark on a log Imt bearing W. by N. Light. — Casoumpequo Light is a fixed white light, on tho northern side of the ontnuice, shown from a wooden tower coloured white, 32 ft. above H. W., vis. 8 m. This harbour was formerly tho most convenient port in the iHlaiul for loading timber, and thoro was a very large quantity shipped ; there being at that time 18 ft. water. At present not more than 12 ft. can bo oaloulated on at H.W., spring-tides ; but Ftrong N.E. winds will sometimes raise tho water a foot higher. Tho tides aro very irregular at certain seasons, ^he morning tides in summer are much liighcr than the evening tides, whioh sometimes disappear, leaving only one day tide during tho 24 hours. H.W., F. and C, at 5 h. 40 m.; springs rise about 3 ft., neaps 2 ft. A stranger bound to this port must always take a pilot ; in fine weather you may anchor outsido, in 5 or G fms., bottom sand. In easterly gales tho bar is I covered by a lino of breakers. In crossing the bar, observe that the white mark on the log house must not be opened in the least to the northward of the beacon, as these objects in one, load in close along the southern edge of tho northern sand. The channel, from one bar to the other, and between sands only covered by a few feet, is 100 fms. wide, with anchorage in 2^ and 3| fms. ; tho best berth is just outside tho entrance, where the sands dry on each side. When inside the harbour | the vessels generally load at h wharf. From Cape Kildare to North Pt. tho distance is 1 1 miles N.N.E. About midway I between is the little R. Tignish, with only 2 feet at its entrance at L.W. ; but it I affords shelter for fishing-boats. Along this part of the coast, from Kildare to[ North Pt., there are rooky irregular soundings, of 3 to 5 fms., extending off| 2 miles in some places. U. MIRAMIORI BAY. 45 f W.V.'Y. 1 W. ; 'i cablon, ami tho )r. Stoor now bo ntorninost beacon in 16 or 10 ft., at , or moro ; and as 10 boftoons exactly , MftllMHlUO, oiHtns bo on Hhoro on tho low tbo boaoonH in NwrrowK, and ovor .V Htill k«Tt in ono, iho othor, until tbo tbo beacons; tbon Id. niuHt bo paHHod the harbour. You ,nd E.N.E., distant Ilorso-Sboo Hands, m 2 J knots; within ; « h. ; springs nso winds tho contrary. ourisN.N.W.iW., 1 W., 6 ndlos from Lblo high sand-hill , gh sand-hills to tho ft. on thoni at L.W. { milo out from tho by a white boacon itb a white mark on lorthom side of tho )ovo H.W., vis. 8 m. island for loading p being at that time [ulatod on at H.W., Iwater a foot higher. 'tides in summer are jar, leaving only one flOm. ; springs nse , in fine weather you Irly gales the bar is Ithat the white mark Iward of the beacon, \i the northern sand, aly covered by a few no best berth is just fn inside the harbour ,TE. About midway Ince at L.W. ; but it last, from Kildare to Ifms., extending off RtiipN, when crossing from thn Magdalnns t on ih«Mr guard aKaiiist getting onibiiyod in tho gnmt V)ight formod by the ))art of PrinuK Kdward Id. In N.K, gales great diflioiilty v;ould be found North Pt., shonld bo i)art.loularly ' " " bN.W. In H>aliiig a sh'p out, as both ilin tide und thit current appnar to snt from thi> north- ward into this bifrht. The northern point of rrinco Edward Id. shoulu at all times havo a wide berth ffiveii it. Hhips bound to Miramichi and tho ports in Northumberland fltrait to tho west- ward of Cape Tormentine, after passing 8t. Paul's Id., generally go to the south- ward of tho Magdalens, round tho northern point of Pri'^"" Edward Id. This Iioint is verjr dangerous at night, and in thick weather ; ai. tlie lead should l)o :('l>t going in rounding it, moro espooiallv if you havo had a northerly w'-id in «troHNiug from tho Magdalens. After passing the North Pt., shape a oourh well to the westward, so as to avoid the West lleef ; passing which, you should keep the lead going, and taking your snundingH from trie edge of the bank running off tlu» main, or New Brunswick shore. After you are past tho West Reef, in proceed- iuff south-«»aHtward, you mav take your sounding's from either shore till you arrive near tho narrow part of the strait off Cape Tormentine. If bound farther I'UMtward, kettp on the island side ; the soundings will guide you jpast Capo Traverse. On this side the tides are not so strong, but the anchorage is good, in (tase of it falling little wind ; while on the opposite shore there is deep water and v(try strong tides, close to Jourimain and Tormentine Reefs. At night, when tho land cannot be seen, and tlie wind contrary, a ship had bettor anchor to the west- ward of Cape Tormentine until dayliglit. Vessels bound to Pietou, and ports eastward of Cape Tormentine, generally l)aH8 through tho Out of Ciinso. But if entering by St. Paul's Id., oare sjiould bo taken to come no nearer to East Pt. (Prince Edward Id.) than 20 fms. in thick weather, or at night; nor to Cape Bear than Ifl fms. ; then keep moro to tho Houthward, to give the Indiim and Rifleman Rkn. a Ixtrth. The liglit on Pt. Prim will be of great Hcrviee to this part of the piiN.sage ; und the lead will be a sufficient guide along tho northern side from St. Peter's Id. to Capo Traverse. THE WESTERN COAST OF THE GULF. FROM POINT ESCUMENAO TO CAPE OASPE; THE BAYS OP MIRAMICHI, CHALEUR, AND GASPE. Light. — PoiKT ESOUMENAO is low, and covered with ppruoe trees, and may bo [known by its wooden Lt.-ho., which is painted white, 58 ft. in height, and 70 ft. labovo the sea, which exhibits a fixed light, and is vis. 14 miles, as noticed in Ipago !)0. I Esoumenao Reef is very dangerous, as it runs off more than 2i miles to the N.E., [where there has lately been found as littlo as 2^ fms. at 2^ milo from the Lt.-ho. JAt night come no nearer than 10 fms. I MIBAMIOHI BAY is 14 miles wide from Pt. Esoumenao to the sands off |Blackland Pt., and about 6 miles deep to the ontranoe between Fox and Portage Ids. The western part of the bay is formed by a range of low narrow islands ; the 86uthemmost is named Huckleberry Id., next Fox Id., then Portage Id. ; and po northernmost is called Negowac Sand Bar. With the exception of tho main j)assaf!;o, between Fox and Portage Ids., tho other channels between those islands are only fit for boats. The water is shallow to the eastward of them to a mile ^rom tho northern end of Negcwac Sand Bar, to tho middle of Portage Id., a iistanco of 6 miles, and from thence the shallows extend 6 miles, to the entrance 3f the Ship Channel ; in the latter distance tho shoals run off full 3 miles from ?ox Id. and the southern part of Portage Id. The southern side of the bay, from . I 46 MIBAMIOHI BAY. Huoklebury Id. to the pitch of Escumenao Reef, is likewise bordered by an extensive 4at, the eastern part of which reaches more than 2^ miles from the shore ; but when you draw near the pilots' house and the Preston lights, you may approach within a mile of the shore ; but you cannot approach the land so near in any other part of the bay as off the Lt. -houses. Lights.— (1). On Pueston's Beaoh, at 5 miles to the westward of Escumenao Pt., two Lt. -houses are erected, 28 and 30 ft. in height, and 55 and 66 ft. above the sea respectively, and exhibit fixed lights, vis. 10 miles. (2). PoRTAQE IsTAND, south end, a white Lt.-ho., showing a fixed Ught, elevated 46 ft. above the sea, vis. 12 miles. (3). Oak Point. — Two white Lt. -houses, bearing east and west of each other, 36 ft. in height, the easternmost 40, and the western 60 ft. above the level of the sea, exhibiting fixed lights, vis. 10 miles. The Bar of Miramichi should never be attempted, in a large vessel, without a pilot. The Miramichi pilots aro generally found cruizing about off Pt. Escumenao, in small schooners ; but should you not meet with a pilot, and too late in the day to cross the bar before dark, you should stand off and on till daylight, and not shoal your water to less than 1 2 fms., particularly with the wind from the eastward. The bar commences from the S. end of Portage Id., and extends across the main entrance nearly 6 m., in a S.E. by S. direction ; it is of sand, with only a foot or two of water upon it in some places ; but near to Portage Id. there is a narrow channel for small vessels. The mark to clear the S.E. extreme of the bar is, the French village kept in the centre of the Fox Gully, bearing west. A black btioy is moored at the S.W. extreme of the bar, in 3 fms.,* to be left on your starboard hand going in ; and a mile N.N.TV. from this is a red buoy, in 3 fms., on the Lump, which must be left on your port hand going in ; so that this part of the channel is crooked and difficult. ' At the entrance of the Ship Channel are 7 ft. at L.W., and 22 ft. at H.W. From the red buoy you have a clear straight channel, nearly \ a mile wide, rimning in a N.W. by N. direction for 3 m., and from 4 to 7 fms. deep, until you arrive at the Spit buoy, which is also a red buoy, and must likewise be left on your port hand going in. There are two beacons on the north point of Fox Id., on the sand-hills, one red, the other white. These kept in one S.E. ^ E., lead in 14 ft. at L.W., to the westward of the 10 ft. mound, on which a white buoy is now moored. There are four red buoys moored nearly in a line on the southern side of the Horse-Shoe shoal, occupying a space of | of a mile in a W. ^ S. direction, and the course from the westernmost red buoy to the black buoy on the S.W. extreme of the shoal is S.W. by W. i W., § of a mUe. After passing close to the northward of the Spit buoy, steer W. by N. | N. from it, or so as to pass to the northward of the white buoy on the 10 feet mound, and thfau midway between it and the easternmost red buoy on the Horse- Shoe, steering W. I S. Leave all the four red' buoys to the northward, at not more than ^ a cable's length, and from the westernmost red buoy steer S.W. by W. I W. and leave the black buoy on the S.W. extreme of the Horse- Shoe also to the northward, or on the right hand. The least water on the Horse-Shoe is 3 ft. If you wish to pass by the old route south-westward of the 10 ft. moimd, leave the red buoy on the Spit close on your port hand, and steer W. by N. from it towards the eastern red buoy of the Horse-Shoe, a little more than ^ a mile, or until the w "st ends of Egg and Fox Ids. come in one, S.W. \ S. ; then steer W.S.W. towards the N.W. point of Vin Id., passing the north point of Fox Id., at 2 or 3 cables' length, untU the two beacons on it come in one, bearing S.E. | E. ; then haul up immediately N.W., keeping the beacons exactly in one, until within ^ a cable's lenjjth from the second red buoy of tho Horse-Shoe; then bear up, keeping without the line of the buoys. The courbc past the four red buoys is W. i S., and the depth 14 ft. at L.W., spring -tides. * From this buoy the Preston Lt.-hoB. bear S. by £. } £., 2 m. iLn. iiih CHALET7R BAY. 47 i bordered by an 2^ miles from the n lights, you may he land so near in ard of Esoumenao 5 and 66 ft. above ig a fixed Jighi, rest of each other, re the level of the i vessel, without a off Pt. Escumenao, too late in the day daylight, and not from the eastward. is across the main vith only a foot or there is a narrow I of the bar is, the 9st. A black bUoy on your starboard in 3 fms., on the it this part of the Ihannel are 7 ft. at V straight channel, )r 3 m., and from 10 a red buoy, and >n the sand-hills, 14 ft. at L.W., to w moored. There of the Horse-Shoe id the course from ne of the shoal is V. by N. i N. from le lU feet mound, on the Horse- he northward, at st red buoy steer me of the Horse- ast water on the ) ft. mound, leave W. by N. from it than ^ a mile, or J S. ; then steer lOint of Fox Id., earing S.E. | E. ; one, until within then bear up, four red buoys is I m. The ship may be safely anchored, in 3 or 4 fms., inside the black buoy, bottom mud. Prom whence the course across the inner bay is W.N.W., 6 m., to the entrance of the river off Oak Pt. Lt.-hos. ; depth 3 to 2 J fms. MIBAMICHI is a place of great trade, and a free warehousing port ; and the different towns on its banks are rising in importance. Large quantities of timber are annually shipped here; and the salmon and Gaspereaux fisheries are also carried on in their season. The four principal towns are Chatham, Douglastown, Newcastle, and Nelsontown. Chatham is the principal town on the Biver Miramichi, about 17 m. to the westward of the Horse-Shoe Bar ; and extends along tho south shore about 1^ m. Here vessels lie in 6 to 8 fms., close to the wharves. It has some good houses, and an English, Presbyterian, and Boman Catholic Church, besides Wesleyan and other chapels. Here are likewise saw and grist mills, which form the most remarkable objects. DoTTGLASTOWN is On the north shore, about 1| m. from Chatham, and has water at its wharves for the largest ships. It is finely situate, on a rising ground. The principal building is the Marine Hospital, buUt of stone. On the opposite side, on the south shore, is the English Episcopalian Church of St. Paul. Newcastle is nearly 2 m. further up the river, on the same side. This is the county town, containing the jail and court-house ; also some good houses, and a Presbyterian Church and Wesleyan Chapel. It stands in a very pleasant situation. Here are 6 or 7 fms. close to the wharves of the town. NEliSONTOWN is the last village and a straggling place. Here is a large wooden Boman Catholic Church ; standing on the south shore, opposite the east end of Beaubera Id. Tho river is navigable as far as Beaubera Id. for any vessel that can cross the Horse-Shoe Bar. TIDES. — It is H.W. at Miramichi Bar at about 4 h.; spring-tides rise 6 ft., neaps 3 ft. At Sheldrake Id., at 6h., spring-tides rise 5 ft., and neaps 3 ft. ; the ebb-tide runs at tho rate of 3 m. an hour in the Sheldrake Channel. It is H.W. at Beaubera Id., on the F. and C, at 6 h. 30 m. ; spring-tides rise 6 ft., neap-tides 4 ft. ; the ebb runs at the rate of 2 knots, and the flood about a knot. At the rapids, in both the S.W. and N.W. arms, the tides flow until 8h., and they rise about 2 ft. ViN Bay is to the west of Vin Id., which is covered with wood. The west end of Vin Id. is nearly 4^ m. W.S.W. ^ W. from the north point of Fox Id. ; and round it and the sandy S.W. point is Vin Harbour, perfectly sheltered from all winds, and with water sufficient for tlie largest ships. A pilot will readily be procured to take the ship into the harbour. There is good anchorage in the eastern part of Vin Bay, about f of a mile to the westward of the island, in 3 fms., muddy bottom, and 3^ m. W.S.W. from the inner black buoy of the Horse- Shoe. From Pt. Escumenao to Miscou Id. N.E. point, the course is N.E. 2 N., distant 68 m. The coast between is low, and wooded, with sand-bars and beaches, enclosing several lagoons, the entrances to which are called gullies, nearly all of which have shifting bars before them, but they all admit shelter for boats. In the whole distance there is not any harbour for shipping, until you arrive at Miscou Harbour, which is on the S.W. side of the island of Miscou. Pine timber and deals are cut, and brought down the Bivers Tracadie and Pocmouche ; tho former 15 and the latter oj m. S.W. of the Shippigan Gully, which separates that island from the main. The timber, &c., from the two rivers above mentioned is rafted along shore, to be shipped at Miramichi or at Shippigan. The Shippioam- Gitlly is 21 m. from the north point of Miscou ; it has a sand- bar and a rapid tide, and a dangerous heavy surf, occasioned by easterly winds. The passage over the bar and into this gully is difiicult and dangerous to strangers, but is often used by the fishermen in their small schooners. The whole of this coast may be safely approached to 6 or 6 fms., or to 10 fms. at night, as will be seen by the chart. OHALEUB BAT. — ^Miscou Id. on the south, and Pt. Macquereau on the north, form the entrance to Chaleur Bay, and bear from each other N.N.W. and S.S.E., 48 MISCOU HARBOUR. distant 14^ m. From the entrance of Chaleur to that of Bistigouche Harhour, which is at its head, the distance on a W. and N.W. by W. course is 75 m. The bay is of moderate depth, as will be seen by the chart ; its navigation is by no means difficult. There are some dangerous shoals, but everywhere good warning by the lead. The climate within the bay is warmer, and the weather finer than it is outside ; there are seldom fogs with southerly winds, but easterly winds bring rain and mist. The southern coast of New Brunswick is much lower generally than the opposite coast of Canada, except between Bathurst and Carraquette, where are the cliffs of red sandstone 200 ft. in height. The tides are easy and regtilar within the bay, seldom amounting to a knot an hour. Lights.— Miscor Island.— (1). On Birch Pt., in lat. 48" 1' 0' and long. 64° 29' 26', is a white octagon Lt.-ho., built of wood, 74 ft. in height, and 79 ft. above the sea, exhibiting a fixed red Lt., visible 12 m. (2). Cakaquette Island, south side of Chaleur Bay. On the west end of the island a white Lt.-ho., 48 ft. in height, and 52 ft. above the sea, showing a fixed Lt., visible 14 m. (3). Paspebiao Point, north side of bay. Near the extremity of the point, a white Lt.-ho., 40 ft. in height, and 55 ft. above the sea, showing a fixed Lt., visible 13 m. These two latter Lts. are lighted only during the season of navigation. Vessels bound into Chaleur Bay should endeavour to make the Id. of Miscou, as the bank extending about 22 m. to the eastward will give sufficient warning to a vessel approaching this part of the coast. The northern edge of the bank, in 30 fms., is 7 or 8 m. to the northward of Birch Pt., and passes the north point of Miscou at the distance of 4 m., and forms a sure guide up the bay at night or iu hazy weathei-. The shoalest part of the bank will be found on an east line from Pt. Birch, where, for the first 6 m. off-shore, there are 5^ to 7 fms., rock'- bottom; it then deepens to 12 and 17 fms., red sand, rock, and shells, for tht next 9 miles ; it then soon deepens to 20 fms., 7 m. further, with 20 to 30 fms., red sand, gravel and shells. Vessels should not attempt to make Pt. Macquereau in foggy weather, which to the eastward is so bold, that there is very little warning by the lead ; but when within the bay, from Port Daniel westward, the 30 fms. lino extends some distance from the north shore, which line should be kept while you are to the eastward of Carlisle. The soundings are generally sand and shells on the banks ; but in the centre parts of the bay it is black and brown mud. A good look-out should always be kept for the numerous fishing schooners generally riding on these banks during the summer months, as easterly winds almost always bring on fogs. The N. point of Miscou will be distinguished by a green mound, or grassy sand- hill, and the shallow water does not extend more than ^ of a mile off shore ; but to the eastward, opposite a small lagoon, where therq are several huts and fishing- stores, shallow water, to 3 fms., stretches off a mile N. -eastward, and there are 6 fms. 2| m. off. From the S.W. part of Miscou Id an extensive flat runs off in a N.W. direction full i^ m. to 5 fms., and 2\ m. off 3 fms. This is called Miscou Flat. Shippigan Flat is to the westward of Miscou Flat, leaving a narrow intricate channel of 5 to 7 fms., which leads into Miscou Harbour, between them. This is the northernmost of the Shippigan Shoals, and has only 6 ft. on some parts of it ; its N. side is 2f m. from Shippigan Id., and may be approached within 6 fms. by a large vessel, and to 3 or 4 fms. by smaller vessels. The western part of this flat forms the eastern boundary of Shippigan Sound. MISCOU HARBOUR is between Miscou and Shippigan Id., and just within the sandy spit at the S.W. point of Miscou, where there are 4 to 6 fms. lov upwards of a mile in length, and 2 cables' length wide ; this part forms the harbour for large vessels ; but the harbour is extensive for small vessels, in 10 to 16 ft,, bottom soft mud. There is a gully on the eastern side of the harbour, where boats can enter from the sea at H.W. This place is much frequented by the American fishermen, who are good pilots for it. The channel leading into the harbour K... e Harbour, n. The bay ty no means ning by tbe • than it is vinds bring er generally Uarraquette, re easy and SHIPPIGAN SOUND, 49 ' and long, t, and 79 ft. t end of the wing a fixed the point, a a fixed Lt., ion. i. of Miscou, Lent warning of the bank, 3 north point i,y at night or 1 an east line 7 fms., rock- hells, for the 20 to 30 fms., eather, which he lead; but extends some ou are to the )n the banks ; ;ood look-out ly riding on plways bring grassy sand- \S shore ; but and fishing- Id, and there >e flat runs off ?his is called row intricate |hem. This is le parts of it ; "lin 6 fms. by of this flat Id just within iov upwards harbour for i5 ft,, bottom Lere boats can [he American the harbour between Miscou and Shippigan Flats is only 170 fms. wide in one part, and both the flats are steep-to, giving no warning by the lead. Only small vessels ought to attempt this harbour without the assistance of a good pilot, or having first buoyed the channel. It is H.W. at 3h. 30m. ; spring-tides rise 5 ft., neaps 3 ft. Fishebman's Ledge. — This is a dangerous bed of rocks, with only 10 ft. on some parts to the northward of Caraquette Bk., and is separated from it by Fisherman's Channel, which is 7 to 4 fms. deep, and a mile wide. This dangerous ledge is If m. long in an E. f S. ^direction, and | of a mile wide from 3 fms. on each side, and lies more in the way than any other in the Bay of Ghaleur. There are no marks for it. Its northern edge is 3 m. northward of Oaraquette Id., and its E. and W. ends bear N.N.E. from the corresponding points of that island. Great Anse Cliff and Donax Pt. in one, bearing W. by N., leads tiirough the Fisherman's Channel. POKESTJEDIE Shoax. — ^This extensive flat runs off 2 m. to the north-eastward from Pokesuedie Id., pnd has only 6 or 7 fms. on a great part of it. The eastern part of this shoal forms the western part of the Shippigan Channel. Caraquette steeple bearing W. I S., in one with the sandy S.E. point of Caraquette Id., leads over the N. point in 2 fms. ; and to dear the shoal in 4| fms., the steeple must be kept half-way between the extreme of the sandy point and the extreme of the trees on the same island. SHIPPIGAN SOUND is formed by Shippigan Id. and flats to the eastward, and Pokesuedie Id. and the mainland on the W. : it is an extensive place. Simon's Inlet, on the western side of the sound, at the southern point of Pokesuedie Id., is the best harbour in the sound. Here you can lie land-locked, with water enough for large ships. On the opposite side is Alemek Harbour, where you lie perfectly secure from all winds, in 3 and 4 fms. at L.W. There is a church and Tillage at the head of the bay. There is u bar of mud and sand across the entrance of Alemek Bay, reducing the depth to 2f fms. at L.W., and into Shippigan Har- bour to 2^ fms. The church and village of Shippigan stand on the S. point of the bay ; and 2| m. to the southward of the church is the entrance to the gully, where the tide is very rapid, but it is used by shallops and fishing boats, although there is often a very heavy surf. Shippigan Harbour is very secure for vessels coming hither for timber. The channel leading from Shippigan Flats to the church is 9 m. in length, without buoys; the water is deep, but the channel is narrow and crooked, without leading marks, and some of the banks very steep, so that an experienced pilot is absolutely necessary to navigate a large vessel into this harbour with safety. In Shippigan Harbour it is H.W. at 3h. 40m. ; spring-tides rise d| to 6 ft., and neaps 3 ft. In the channel the rate seldom exceeds a knot. In &ie weather the stream is regular, running in through the gully and through the sound to the northward into Chaleur Bay, from about half-ebb to half-flood by the shore ; and in the contrary direction from half -flood to half-ebb. Caraquette Island is low and wooded, and If m. long, in a direction nearly parallel to the coast ; sandy points extend from both ends of the island towards the mainland, so as to form a bay, in which there is a land-locked anchorage for vessels drawing under 15 ft. To the westward of the island is all shoal to Pt. I Mizzenette. Caraquette Shoal extends 4^ m. to the eastward of the island, from which it I dries out nearly 2 m., and it is very shallow on all parts of it. From its E. end, Caraquette steeple bears W. | S., and in one with the extreme of the trees on Caraquette Id.; and Shippigan steeple, S., in one with Pokesuedie Pt. This latter I bearing clears the shoal to the eastward, in 3 fms. at L.W. ; but a largo ship must I keep Pokesuedie bearing S. by W. % W., and in one with Pt. Marcelle. Mii^zenette ledge of rocks, with 5 ft. least water, is N.N.W., l\ m. from the IW. end of Caraquette Id. Donax Pt. just open of Mizzenette Pt. W.N.W. ^ W., Iclears the Ibdge to the northward, in 3^ fms., and also leads along the N. side of Ithe Caraquette Shoals, but will lead over the Scallop Patch, of 16 ft., at L.W., rocky. When on this patch Caraquette Church steeple and the N.W end of [G. & R. St. Lawbence.] si 60 CARAQUETTE AND BATHURST HARBOURS. ! W., Caraquette Id. aro in ono ; the S.E. end of the island will then bear S.S.W. distant 2 miles ; keep along the northern edge of Caraquette Shoal in 4 f ms. The HABBOUB of CAEAQUETTE.— The cbannel forming the entrance to the harbour is between the Caraquette and Pokesuedio Shoals for about 2| miles, and it has water enough for the largest ships, but it is crooked, about 2^ cables' length wide, and very steep to the edge of the shoals, and being without good leading marks, it becomes a very difficult channel. The harbour commences immemately to the westward of Pokesudie Id., and extends westward between the mainland and Caraquette Id. and Shoal. Caraquette church stands conspicuously on a ridge opposite Mizzenette Pt., and the fish stores and houses of Lower Caraquette will be seen farther eastward, opposite the island. Between the island and the main the channel is only 120fms. wide, and 2f deep, but farther westward it becomes wider, and has a depth of 4| fms. ; within thn harbour the bottom is mud, but the entrance is of sand. Although an excellent harbour for merchant-vespels of large burthen, it is an exceedingly dangerous place for a vessel to attempt without a pilot. Winds from N.W. round north- easterly to S. by E. are fair for going in. Vessels from the westward should pass outside of Fisherman's Ledge, not going to the southward into a less depth uian 6 fms., until Pokesuedie and Marcelle Pts. come in one, S.S.W. ; you must then haul up upon those leading marks, and enter the channel as from the eastward. A small vessel may pass through the Fisherman's Channel. The tides rise from 3 to 6 ft., and they seldom run stronger than a knot an hour. From Pt. Mizzenette to the Bar of Bathurst, a distance of 27 miles, the coast is clear of all dangers, except Norton Shoal, of 3 fms., which is a mile to the west- ward of Norton Pt., and 9 miles, eastward of Nipisighit, and f of a mile from the land. The coast is generally high sandstone cliSa, and the shoal water seldom extends | a mile from shore, which may safely be approached everywhere by the lead, to 12 or 10 fms. At Great Anse, 8 miles from Mizzenette, there is a church and a fishing establishment ; and there are settlements all along the shore. There is a small rivir at Pokeshaw, 3 miles westward of Gb-eat Anse, and shelter for boats at both places. BATHURST HARBOUR, at the head of Nipisighit Bay, is about 2 cables' length in width, between Carron and Alston Pts.; these points are of sand, with stores and othor buildings upon them. There aro two beacons on Carron Pt., on the S.E. side, which, when kept in one, bearing S.W. 5 S., lead in through the narrow channel over the bar in 7 ft. at L.W., and 14 at H.W., spring-tides. From 3 fms. outside the bar to the entrance of the river is 1 J mile, very narrow 1 the whole distance, and between sandy shoals, nearly dry at L.W, Between the sandy points, or just outside, in 3 or 4 fms., vessels generally moor to take in timber. It is H.W. at Bathurst Harbour at 3 h. 15 m.; spring-tides rise 7 ft., neaps 4 ft. The Town op Bathurst is well situated, 2^ miles within the entrance, and at the head of the basin ; a depth of 14 ft. at H.W. can be carried up to the wharves of the town, and vessels may lie in 14 ft. at L.W., in some parts of the channel; here the tide runs from If to 2 knots, and sets fairly in and out of the bar, which should never be crossed without a pilot, who are always on the look-out fori vessels. Bathurst Bar bears from Paspebiac Pt. on the Canadian shore, S.W. by W., [ distant 24 miles. From the Bar of Bathurst to Belleduno Pt., the distance is about 16 miles,! between which the coast is rocky nearly ^ a mile ot£, but may safely be approached I by the lead to 10 fms. ; about midway between will be seen the church and village! of Rochette. From Belledune Pt. to the eastern end of Heron Id., the course! is N.W. , 13 miles; and you may safely approach within a mile of the shore the I whole distance. At night come no nearer than 10 fms. | Heron Island is 4 miles long, in a N.W. by N. and S.E. by S. direction, with! good anchorage between it and the main ; but the shoals running off each sidol render the channel narrow and difficult. This channel is from 3 to 6 fms. doepl at L.W. Heron Ek., near the eastern part of the channel, is nearly in the middleJ DALHOUSIE HABBOUR. — RESTIGOUCHE RIVER. 51 s.s.w. I w.. n 4 f ms. e eutrance to bout 2i miles, jout 2i cables' ; without good or comniences rd between the i conspiououaly uses of Lower le, and 2i deep, ns.; within thf) 'h an excellent Eigly dangerous V. round north- rard should pass less depth than ; you must then in the eastward. ) tides rise from dies, the coast is lUe to the west- E a mile from the oal water seldom rerywhere by the there is a church ;lie shore. There and shelter for J S. dlTCction, with Ining off each side I 3 to 6 fms. deep Iirlyin the middle,' and directly in the way of vessels ; there are only 6 ft. on it, with 4 to 6 fms. all round it. The S.E. end of Heron Id. bears E.N.E. from it, distant a mile ; and a rock, 300 fms. northward of Beaver Pt., and always above water, W. ^ S., 3iJ0 fms. The latter rock is quite bold, and a vessel, b^ passing within 1 or 2 cables' length of it, may clear the Heron Bk. on the southern side; Large vessels should always take a puot, as this is an intricate and dangerous channel. NAsn RrvEB. — Vessels sometimes load timber in the bay ofF this river ; they moor In 4 fms. mud, with the eastern point of Heron Id. N. by W., 2^ miles, and Black Pt. N.W., about a mile. There is good anchorage at the western end of Heron Id., between it and the B. Carlo ; this latter river only admits boats. DALHOUSIE HABBOUB.— Dalhousie Island is 2 cables in length, rooky, high, wooded, and joined to the main by a shoal that dries to the low point of Dalhousie, where there are large storehouses belonging to the town of Dalhousie; the town and church will be seen pleasantly situated by the southern side of a hill, S.W. of the island. About 3 cables' length to the westward of the island, is a small islet at the end of a sandy spit ; this islet forms the western side of the shallow bay of Dalhousie, and a shallow bank runs from the island to the islet ; along the northern edge of this bank the timber- ships lie to load their cargoes, in 6 or 7 fms. Light. — On BoxAMi Pt., south side of entrance to Dalhousie Harbour, a square wooden Lt.-ho. is erected, painted white. The building is 33 ft. in height, and 49 ft. above H.W., and exhibits a fixed white Lt., visible 13 m. during the season of navigation. Dalhousie Harbour maybe entered either from the eastward between Dalhousie Id. and the Middle Ground ; or from the north-westward by passing round to the northward of the Middle Ground. In this western passage is most room, but you must cross a flat of 3 fms. at L.W. ; the eastern passage is onljr 1| cable's length wide, 6 fms. deep, and quite safe. The Middle Ground, which is on the northern side of the harbour, opposite the island, is d| cables in length, N.N.E. and S.S.W., and 4 cables in breadui, with 6 ft. on its eastern and shouest part ; a black buoy is placed on its N.E. point. The channel between this part of the Middle Ground and mainland to the eastward, is about f of a nule wide, with 12 to 16 fms. in it ; here the tide runs about 2 knots. Ships bound to Dalhousie Harbour may, when off Carlisle Pt., with the point bearing N., distant 5 miles, steer N.W. by W., 34 miles, which will bring them between the eastern point of Heron Id. and Tracadigash Pt. ; in this run you will shoal your water regularly from 3d to 12 or 10 fms. The leading mark to clear Heron Id. bank, which runs off from its N.E. side, is Mount Scaimienac, open N. of Dalhousie Id. ; this mark will carrj' near Maguacha Pt., off which is a spit I of only 6 ft. to the S.W. almost a mile ; approaching this latter point, you must bring Mount Scaumenac open to the S.W. of Dalhousie Id. ; keep these marks on 1 until you are in 8 or 9 fms. on tho New Brunswick shore, and have the Bonami Eks. S.W. of you I a mile, then haul to the northward, keeping in 8 or 9 fms. till Laline Pt. (the extreme point to the W. on the New Brunswick shore), comes just [open N. of Dalhousie Id., and the rocks and islet to the westward of it, bearing IW. by N.; now steer in on these leading marks W. by N., until you approach iDalhousie Id., leaving it 50 or 100 yarda to the southward of you, and you will [enter the harbour with safety, where you can anchor in 6 fms. abreast of the town. If bound into the harbour by the western channel you must steer to the north- Iward, past tho buoy on tho Middle Ground, rounding it at 2 or 3 cables' length ; |tben keep on W. by N. or W., until the Church of Dalhousie bears S. by W. and midway between tho Id. of Dalhousie and tho islet to the westward of it. Steer Kvith the church S. by W., and it will take you across the 3-fm. flat into the harbour. RESTIGOUCHE RIVER.— The entrance of this river is between Maguacha Pt. and the Bonami Rks., and is about 2 miles wide. The rocks bear W. ^ N. from [the point, and may be safely approached within 2 cables' length ; but the spit off laguacha Pt. must be carefully avoided. From hence to Campbell Town, at the liead of the navigable river, the distance is 16 miles ; tho river is navigable for large vessels to within 4 miles of Campbell Town, where tho channel becomes I 52 CFKLEUR BAY. — CARLISLE POINT. narrow and intricate. A stranger should not attempt to go further than Dal- housie, or the anchorage at Fleurant Pt., which is 2 miles to the northward of Di^ousie, without an experienced pilot. The Fleurant Pt. anchorage is very convenient for vessels wanting supplies of wood and water ; ;^ou can anchor in 7 or 8 fms., and leave it at any time of the tide, and with any wind. Campbell Town is situated on the southern side of the river, at the foot of the Sugar-Loaf Mountain, which is 950 ft. hi^. At H.W., vessels of 19 and 20 ft. can get up to the town, and lie afloat at L.W. It is H.W. at Campbell Town at 4 h. ; spnng-tides rise 9 to 10 ft., neaps 7 ft. NOETH COAST OF CHALEUR BAY.— Caelton Road.— This is an ex- cellent roadRtead, affording an extensive anchorage, in 6 to 7 fms., and is situated in the bay on the western side of Tracadigash Ft. Within this point is the entrance to a small lagoon, which boats can enter. On the northern side of this lagoon stands the viUage of Carlton, with its church ; the village extends along the northern shore of the bay a considerable distance to the westward. The western side of this bay is shallow some dislance off. Carlton Mountain is immediately to the northward of the village, and is 1830 ft. high. The best berth to anchor is with Carlton steeple E. by S., and Tracadigash Pt. S. by E. i E. The tides in this bay are very weak. Tracadigash Spit runs off | a mile from the sandy point, and must be carefully avoided when taking or leaving the anchorage. The mark to clear the spit in 5 fms. is Mount Dalhousie, just open S. of Ft. Maguaoha, bearing about W.N.W. } W. ; at night come no nearer than 10 fms. When Carlton ohxirch steeple bears N.E. by E., you may haul to the northward for the anchorage, coming no nearer than 7 fms., imtil the point bears southward of E. CASCAPEDIAC BAY.— From Tracadigash Pt. to Black Pt. the bearing is E. by S., distant 13 miles ; between is the capacious Bay of Cascapediao. At the head of the bay is the river of that name, but it can only be entered by boats. There are extensive shallows at the head of the bay, as will be seen by the chart. Black Pt. is 400 ft. in height, bold and rocky. Tlie western side of the bay is all settled by French and Arcadians. RICBUIOND. — ^This village, with its church, stands well within the bay, on the eastern side, nearly 4 miles N.N.W. of Black Pt., and a mile to the northward of Indian Pt. The anchorage for the timber ships is before the town, in 3 fms., with the church bearing N.E. by E., and Black Pt. S.E. by S. ; you may anchor farther out in 6 or 6 fms., but not so well sheltered. When coming towards Richmond from the east, in order to avoid the shoal that stretches off to the westward If mile from Indian Pt., keep Red Pt. well open of Black Pt. S.E. i E., and come no nearer than 4 or 5 fms., until the church bears N.E. by E. ; then steer for it, and as'shor as before. Bonaventiire Point is S.E. ^ S., 16 miles from Black Pt., and 7 miles from Red Pt. ; Bonaventure R. is 2 miles northward of the point, an i has only 2 ft. over the bar. A rocky shoal runs off the point to the westward, nearly a mile, and continues at some distance from the shore to near Red Pt. CARLISLE POINT is 6 m. E.S.E. from Bonaventure Pt., and forms the western point of Paapebiao Bay, which is an excellent roadstead, and here is the principal fishing establishment in the Bay of Chaleur. New Carlisle is the county town, and the court house and jail can be seen from the anchorage ; the point is wooded, and consists of sand. Paspebiac Pt., which is 3J m. to the eastward of Carlisle Pt., and forms the eastern point of the bay, is a triangular point of sand and a shingly beach, inclosing a small lagoon. The town is considerable, although straggling along the coast ; and there is an English and Roman Catholic Church. On the west side of the point are a number of fishing- huts, and the extensive white buildings belonging to the fishing establishment of Messrs. Robins & Co., of Jersey. Vessels lie in this excellent roadstead, sheltered from S.E., round N. to W, although open to southerly winds. Jersey vessels lie moored here all the season ; the holding ground is excellent. A sandy spit runs out south-westward, nearly ^ a mile from the point. The best berth to anchor is in 6 fms., clay, with the sandy point S.E., and Robins' flagstaff east. PORT DANIEL. — CAPE DESPAIR. 58 Br than Dal- lorthward of »rage is very ian anchor in le foot of the 19 and 20 ft. pbell Town at lis is an eix- ind is situated i point is the m side of this extends along estward. The t Mountain is The best berth S. by E. k E. I mile from the the anchorage, open S. of Pt. er than 10 fms. 3 northward for louthward of E. the bearing is pediac. At the atered by boats, en by the chart, of the bay is all thebay, ontho he northward of I, in 3 fms., with jr anchor farther Richmond from i,rd If mile from come no nearer ,r it, and amhor miles from Bed Lly 2 ft. over the tly a mile, and and forms the and here is the [sle is the county 56 ; the point is and forms the shingly beach, ftraggling along bh. On the west 1 white buildings • Jersey. Vessels J, although open Un ; the holding Irly i a mile from pandy point S.E., At Paspebiao there is an excellent watering place at a stream which will be seen falling from the cliffs just to the westward of the outlet of the lagoon. Supplies of all Kinds may be had here, but to a limited extent. In roimding Paspebiao Pt. from the eastward, keep Daniel Hill open to the southward of Nouvelle Pt. E.N.E. | E.. untU the Roman Catholic Church opens to the westward of the south end of the sandy spit N. by E. ^ E. ; keep the lead going, and steer towards Carlisle Pt., imtil Robins' store and the Roman Catholic Church come in one N.E. | E. ; now haul in to the northward for the anchorage by your lead, taking care to give the west side of the spit a berth in going in. Nouvelle River is 6^ m. to the eastward of Paspebiao ; it has 2 ft. on the bar at L.W., and will be known by its stages and fish stores ; its west side is a high cliff of red sandstone. From Nouvelle River to the west point of Port Daniel, the course is E.N.E. '" "^i., distant 9 m. ; this part of the coast is bold-to, and nearly straight, "^an 11, which is about 40r ''■ ^^%i\, and stands about a mile to the westwar . ■ the r ,, will serve to poin'i, . the port. PORT IjaNIEL. — This is a fine deep bay, with a river at the northern part of it; it is of a moderate depth, having 7 fms. in a line between the points, decreasing to 5 and 4 fms. towards the river, which will only admit boats at H.W. There are several houses and stores near the river; and wood and water may be obtained. The bay is open to easterly winds ; and the west side of the bay is shallow nearly ^ a mile off from the West Pt. roimd to the river. Pillar Pt. is the eastwn point of the bay ; aboutf of a mile within it is White Pt., known by its colour; about midway between White Pt. and West Pt., in 6 fms., is the best anchorage ; but easterly winds send in a heavy sweU, and on their appearance you ought to leave this anchorage. Macquereau Pt. is 6 m. to the eastward of Pillar Pt.; about midway between is Red Pt., known by its colour. Pt. Macquereau is about 200 ft. high, and covered with wood. From Macquereau Pt. to Cape Despair the course is E.N.E., 23 m. In the bay between are the fishing establishments of Newport, Great and Little Pabou, and Gruid River ; the latter is a considerable stream ; here is a village and extensive fishing establishment. Vessels bound for Chaleur Bay in a dark night or in foggy weather, should not attempt to make Macquereau Pt., which is so low that there is little or no warning by the lead; but should strike soundings on the Miscou Bank, which extend nearly 22 m. to the eastward of Miscou Id. A cautious look-out should be kept for the numerous fishing schooners, which are generally riding on the banks ; the northern edge of the latter, being followed in 30 fms., will safely conduct vessels past the north point of Miscou, at the distance of 4 m., and forms a sure guide up the bay. In addition to the soundings there is the assistance of the Lt.-ho. on Miscou Id. CAPE DESPAIR, the N.E. point of the bay of Chaleur, is of a moderate height, consisting of red sandstone cliffs. Nearly S.S.E., 1^ m. from Cape Despair, is the Leander Rk., on the shoalest part of which are 16 to 18 ft. ; it is about | of a mile in diameter. As this rock is in the fairway of vessels coming from the northward for Chaleur Bay, it should be avoided by giving the cape a berth of 3 m. In clear weather, when the marks can be seen, Perc§ Rk. kept well open of White Hd. will lead clear outside of the shoal. There is a good channel between the cape and the rock ; and White Hd. kept in the middle of Perc4 Rk., will lead through this inner channel, in 15 or 16 fms. BONAVEMTURE ISLAND is E. by N., 7 m. from Cape Despair; bold perpendicular cliffs on all sides except the west, rising in places to 250 ft. above the sea. From the west side shoal water runs off nearly | of a mile. Between the island and PercS Rk. the channel is 1;; m. wide, and tree from danger. Peroe Rook is 288 feet high, precipitous all roimd, and bold to seaward, and is joined to the main by a reef about | of a mile long, in a S.E. direction; between this rock and White Hd. is Perc6 Bay, and along the shores is the town of Perc^, chiefiy inhabited by persons engaged in the fishwies. From Perce Rk., nearly half way to White Hd., the shoal water extends out nearly J of a mile; and Perce Beef, which is rocky, runs off | a mile from the centre of the town ; although 54 GASPE BAY. — GASPE HARBOUR. small vessels anchor on eaoh side of this reef, it is not a safe roadstead for shipping. Perce Mountain is very remarkable, and can be seen at sea 40 m. off. A regular tide of flood and ebb (but weak) sets through Perc4 Bay; but a few miles without Bonaventure Id., the current from the Biver St. Lawrence runs to the southward at all times. MAL BAY is 4 m. deep, and 5 or 6 m. wide, and is entirely open to the south- eastward. The cliffs on its S.W. side are perpendiciilar, and 666 ft. in height ; a fine broad, sandy beach extends across the head of the bay. There is a nver at the N.W. comer of the bay, which admits boats at H.W. The N.E. part of the bay has low cliffs. There is anchorage round the shores of this bay ; but it cannot be recommended as a roadstead. Point Peteb, the south point of Gaspd and N.E. point of Mai Bay, is low, and covered with white houses. Flat Id. is 4 cables' length eastward of the point ; small and low. There is a clear channel of 5 to 9 fms. between it and the island, but no anchorage. Gape Gaspg bears from Flat Id. N.N.E. | E., 7 m. G-ASPE BAY. — ^This fine say has a good outer roadstead, off Douglas Town, on the south side, and h, fine safe harbour at its head, capable of holdmg a large fleet in safety; also a basin, where ships might be refitted or hove down. From Flat Id. to sandy Beach Pt. the course is N. by W. ^ W., 16 m. ; and from Cape Oaspg N.W. by N., 11^ m. The southern shore presents a succession of steep cliffs, which are 200 ft. high ; but inland, a few miles, the mountains rise to 1600 ft. ; a31 along this shore shoal water runs off the cliffs nearly | a mile. Lights. — (1.) On the northern shore of the bay, 12 m. N.W. by N. from the cape, a fixed lit., elevated 40 ft. above the sea, visible 11 m. (2.) On O'Hara Pt., wharf basin, a red Lt. is shown o^y when mail steamers are expected, elevated 20 ft., and visible 7 m. CAPE GASPE is a remarkable headland, its N.E. side being all high cliffs, nearly 700 ft. in height. Flower Pot Bk. is close to the cape, and was a remark- able object ; but was thrown down by the ice in 1844, and the base is now only left, and is awash at H.W. The N.E. side of the bay, for 6 or 6 m. within is covered with houses, chiefly fishing establishments belonging to Jersey merchants. This part of the bay is free from danger, except the Seal Bks., about 6| m. within Cape Gasp6, and a mile S.E. of Cape Brule ; this reef has only 4 ft. on its shoalest part, is about ^ a mile long, and ^ wide. The mark for the outer edge is Cape Brule in one with the next cliffy point up the bay ; therefore, when beating, keep Cape James well open of Cape Brule. DotTOLAS Toynx stands on the south side of the river St. John, on a rising groimd. The water, which is deep at the outer part of the bay, shoals regularly as you approach the anchorage off Douglas, where there is plenty of room, in any depth between 5 and 10 fms., sand and clay bottom; anchor, with the entrance of the Biver St. John N.W. by W., in 6 to 8 fms., and you will be a full mile from the entrance. Water may be obtained at the Biver St. John, about 2 m. within the entrance. Cape Haldimand is a bluff cliff, about 2 m. northward of Douglas ; from the N.E. side of which Sandy Beach Pt. runs out, in a northerly direction, and forms Gaspe Harbour. Sandy Beach Pt. is a narrow low point of sand : the side next the sea is shallow near ^ a mile off, as will be seen by the chart ; but the inner, or western side, is bold and steep-to ; on the eastern side it is also very steep imme- diately outside the shallow water, which extern ds from the beach ; this renders it very dangerous at night, as the lead gives so little warning. The Peninsula is on the opposite side, about a mile to the northward of the Sandy Beach Pt. ; it is low, and covered with trees, having several sheds and a beacon near its W. point ; between the shoals that run off from the N. end of Sandy Beach Pt., and those that extend eastward from the Peninsula, is the entrance into Gaspe Harbour, which is only about 4 cables' length wide, and 10 to 11 fms. deep, mid-channel. GASPE HABBOUR.— When you get within Sandy Beach Pt., and the Peninsula, you are in the harbour of Gaspe, and completely sheltered from all winds; bottom mud, and the deepest water 11 fms. Within the harbour the NORTH COAST OP THE RIVER. 56 river divides into two branches, called the N.W. and S.W. am s ; within the latter is the basin, where a sreat number of vessols may lie as securely as in dock. The town of Gaspg is on tuo S. side of the entrance to the basin, and along the shores of the basin the principal inhabitants reside; and here is the custom-house. Several schooners are employed in the whale-fishery from this place ; and an extensive cod-fishery is carried on in the bay, chiefly by the Jersey merchants. It is H.W., F. and 0., at 1 h. fiOm, ; spring- tides rise 5 ft., neaps 3 ft. Vessels having occasion to go to Gaspe to report or clear, can anchor off Douglas, when the master may proceed to the town in a boat. A stranger, without a pilot, had better anchor off Douglas than attempt to take the harbour on a dark night. In the summer there is generally a land and sea-breeze, the sea-breeze setting in between 9 and 10 a.m., and continuing till sunset ; it then falls calm, and the land-breeze comes on about 9 or 10 at night. When entering Gaspe Harbour, the mark for the N. end of Sandy Beach Pt. (now marked by a white buoy) is Pt. Panard (a woody point on the N. shore, nearly 3 m. within the Peninsula) in one with the inner or N. side of the whale sheds on the Peninsula point. The spruce trees on the Peninsula are to the northward of the whale sheds. The marks to lead in clear of Sandy Beach Pt. are — the extremity of the spruce trees on the Peninsula in one with Pt. Fenard, bearing N.W., a little westerly; keep this mark on until the windmill (which stands on the insidu of Sandy Beach Pt., near the mainland) comes in one with the inner or W. side of the end of Sandy Beach Pt., bearing S. ^ V when you must haul to the westward for the anchorage, or proceed for the bas. , When working into the harbour you must, when standing to the southward, towards Sandy Beach Pt. , tack as soon as the leading mark comes on ; but when standing to the northward, you may go by the lead. GUBRENTS.— Off Cape Gaspe the currents set strongly to the southward towards Flat Id., sometimes 2 knots, which ou^ht to be carefully guarded against when making for this bay with a northerly wind. When this current meets the swell from the southward, it causes a high, short-breaking sea from Cape Bozier across the entrance of Gaspe Bay. In light winds a vessel becomes quite un- manageable in this soa. Vessels approaching the coast in this vicinity, should, at night, or in dark weather, keep the deep-sea lead going, as soundings extend a great distance from the land. NORTH COAST OF THE RIVER. FEOM THE BIVEB ST. JOHN TO POINT DE MONTS, AND FBOM THENCE TO POINT MILLE VACHE. From the River St. John to the Great Boule Id., which is the easternmost of the Seven Ids., the course is W. by N. | N., distance 78 m. The coast is only partially wooded ; the hills next the sea seldom exceed 200 to 300 ft. in height ; but a short distance back they form a range of greater elevation, from 500 to 700 ft. in height, and nowhere exceeding 1000 ft. llie appearance of thispart of the coast from a vessel in the offing, is so much alike that it is difficult to make out one part of it from another. Mount St. John, 11m. N.E. by N. from the mouth of the Biver St. John, is 1416 ft. in height, and readily distinguished. Although this coust appears bold, it should be approached with caution, for there are several rocks along it, both above and under water ; several of them are very dangerous, and nearly a mile from the shore. The river St. John. — The E. point of entrance to this river is in lat. 50" 17' 3' and long, ui'' 20' 13'; it is a large stream, frequented by fishing schooners early in the season. The entrance is 130 fms. wide, between a sandy point on the E., and clay cliffs on the W. ; immediately within the entrance the breadth increases 56 MANITOU RIVER. — MOISIC BAY. to nearly | a mile, and then grndunll^ decreases again. There are two log honsoa on the W. bank, about J a mile within the nntranoo, whore the salmon flshcrmon reside, and vessels lie in 12 ft. at L.W., close to them. This river has a shifting bar, I a mile outside the entrance, rendering it impassable with S.- westerly winds; there are only 3 or*4 ft. on the bar at L.W., and 7 to 10 ft. at H.W. There is good anchorage outside the bar, shoaling gradually to 3 fms., | of a mile off. Maqfie Bay. — Ma^ie Point is W.N. W., 8 m. from the R. St. John ; between them is Magpie Bay, in which there is ^ood anchorage with ofl'-shore winds, in a moderate depth of water. Magpie R. discharges itself by a rapid stream near the centre of the bay; the entrance is only 10 fms. wide, and just within it there is a waterfall of 30 ft., so that even boats cannot enter. Nearly a mile westward of the river, and 4 of a mile off-shore, is a rocky shoal, on which the sea breaks ; a heavy sea sets In with southerly winds. Ridge Point is W.N.W. f W., 3| m. from Magpie Pt. From the former a long narrow ridge extends 4| m. to the westward, with 4 to 5 fms. on it, all rocky ground ; within this reef there is one large and several small islets. There are 20 fms. just outside the ridge, and a heavy sea on it sometimes. Sawbill River is about 24 m. to the westward of the River St. John. It may be distinguished by the peculiar hills on each side of it, which are barren, and also by the clay cliffs just witnin the entrance. It can only be entered in very fine weather : it then affords shelter for boats and small coasters. OoD Baitk. — At 9 m. S. by E. from the entrance of the Sawbill, there is a bank of sand, gravel, and broken shells, on which cod fish abound, and the depth is upwards of 60 fms. between it and the shore. Shallop River is N.W. by W., 7^ m. from Sawbill R. It only affords shelter for boats, and these can only enter when there is no surf. Off this as well as off Sandy R., 2^ m. farther westward, there are several rocks, both above and under water ; some of them are full ^ a mile from the shore. Manitou Riveb is N.W. by W.,4i m. from Shallop R., and 35 m. westward of St. John R. It is the largest on the coast between the E. St. John and Moisic. It may bo readily known by a vessel when several leagues in the ofBng, by two remarkable patches of clay cliff ; one of these is close to the eastward, the other a mile to the north-westward of it. At a short distance within the entrance of this river is one of the most magnificent waterfalls in Lower Canada ; it falls 113 ft. perpendicularly, in one unbroken sheet of water. There is good anchorage off the river in fine weather, with off-shore winds, in 16 fms., the entrance bearing N.E. ^ E., 1| mile; small vessels may anchor farther in-shore. There is a small rocky shoal W. by N., 2\ miles from the entrance of the river, about ■{ of a mile from the land. Basin Eiver is W.N.W., lOf miles from Manitou R. ; it is only fit for boats. There are rapids ^ of a mile within the entrance. Cape Cormorant is 1^ i;^IL co the westward of Basin R. Beaskowitz Pt. is 5| miles W.N.W. | W. from Cape Cormorant; between them are the Cormorant Islets joined to the shore at L.W., and the Cormorant Reef, which is dangerous, having only 1 2 ft. on it, about a mile from the shore, and 2J miles W. | N. from Cormorant Pt. Point St. Charles is the eastern point of Moisio Bay. A reef runs off this point, which is extremely dangerous ; it being so bold that there is no warning by the lep.d, and very little by the deep-sea lead. It is composed of numerous rocks, having deep water between them ; some of them are always above water, but the outermost are always covered ; these latter lie S.S.W., | of a mile from Pt. St. Charles. Vcssole bepting hero should guard against getting becalmed to the westward of this reef, lest the heavy S.W. swell should set them towards the reef, for the water is too deep to anchor in, till close to tlie breakers. Moisio Bay is between Pt. St. Charles and Moisic R. It is 11 miles across, having a depth of 50 or 60 fms. between the points. Trout R. is nearly in the centre of the bay. The eastern shores of this bay are rocky ; but the western shore, from Trout II. to Moisic 11., is a bold sandy beach. Seal House Cove, on the eastern side of the bay, affords shelter only for boats. III THE SEVEN ISLANDS. 67 '0 log honaos lon flahennon iias a shifting uterly winds; W. There is mile off. )hn; between re winds, in a ream near the »n it there is e westward of sea breaks; a former a long n it, all rocky its. There are in. It may be en, and also by y fine weather : there is a bank id the depth is 'ords shelter for , as well as off 30V0 and under m. westward of hn and Moisio. I ofilng, by two ard, the other a entrance of this ; it falls 113 ft. ichorage off the itranco bearing There is a small )0ut \ of a mile ly fit for boats. mt is li -ii"^ to W. from Cape shore at L.W., ;. on it, about a IS off this point, warning by the lumerous rocks, e water, but the ile from Pt. St. lecahned to the iwards the reef, 11 miles across, is nearly in the jbut the western iHouse Cove, on Moisio River enters the sea at the western point of the bay, Moisio Pt. formins the western side of the entrance. This is a larger river than St. John, but it i» much obstructed by sand-bars ; it has about 9 ft. at L.W., at the entrance, but boats cannot go far up the river, on account of the rapids. The tides rise here from 6 to 8 it. The bar of this river is very steep, having 40 fms. dose to it. From Moisic Pt. a large triangular shoal of from 1 to 2 fms, runs off 3 J miles, in u westerly direction. Near the S.W. extremity lies the Moisio Kk., of only 9 ft. ; this is 1|^ mile from the shore, and extremely dangerous, being as bold as a wall on the 8, and S.W, sides, and can generally be seen in fine weather, from tho change in tho colour of the water. When a vessel is standing in towards this rock, she should tao'c when the northern side of Manowin Id. comes on with the Kouthern side of Great Boulo Id., bearing W.N.W, ) W.; you will then bo a mile froni the edge of the shoal. It is II. W. at Moisio B., F. and 0., at 1 h. 30 m. Springs rise 8 ft,, neaps 6 ft. Sandy Pt, is N,W. i W., 9 m, from tho Moisio Rk., between whicli is Boule Bay, a place where vessels ought not to venture, on account of tho southerly HWuU rolling in, as they would find it difficult to beat out. The East Bks. are near the centre of Boule Bay; they are low, bare of trees, and always above water. Tlie SEVEN ISLANDS lie directly before the boauMful bay of that name ; they are very remarkable, being high, steep, and thinly wooded, and may bo scon 21 to 24 m, Tho two easternmost islands are named the Great and Little Boule ; tho former is U9fi ft, high ; the passage between them is unsafe, on account of the baffling winds and strong tides, Wostweurd of theso are the two Basque Ids. ; Groat Basque Id, is 600 ft, high, S.W. c2 tho Basque Ids. are tho Manowin and Carousel Ids, ; the fomer is 467 ft. high, tho latter is much lower, and is tho southernmost of all the six islands. There aro only 6 of these ; but the peninsula which forms the western part of tho bay has every appearance of an island from a ship in the offing, and is the highest, being 737 ft. above the sea. This peninsula forms the western and Sandy Pt. the eastern point, of this fine bay. SEVEN ISLANDS BAY is completely sheltered by the before-mentioned islands ; the entrance between Sandy Ft. on tho east, and the high peninsula on tho west is 21 m, wide. A fine, broad, bold sandy beach extends for 3 m. north- ward from the east point of the bay to the entrance to the principal river, near which stands the Hudson's Bay Company's trading post, xou cannot see theso houses from the outer parts of tho bay, but there is a wooden store on the beach off which vessels usually anchor. This bay is sufficiently extensive for the largest fleets to lie in perfect safety, and so nearly land-locked as to resemble a lake. There are three channels leading into the bay, viz. : — The Eastern, Middle and Western Channels, The Eastern Channel, between Sandy Pt, and Basque Id,, is seldom used, having a rock in the centre, which is only covered at high tide, and a reef runs off to the eastward of the rock ^ of a mile, with 6 to 9 ft. on it. The principal and best channel is the middle one, between Carousel and Manowin on tho W., and the Basque Ida. on the E.; leaving the West Rks. and Pt. Chasse on tho peninsula, on your ]>ort hand, giving the latter point a berth of IJ cable's length to avoid a reef that runs off 120 fms. The course through the Middle Channel into the bay is N. The W. Channel, though much narrower than the middle one, is also free from danger, being J of a mile wide, between Pt. Croix and tho West Rks., off which there are two or three rocks, a cable's length to the northward ; therefore give the West Rks. a berth of 2 cables' length in passing. The ebb-tide is turned off towards these rocks by Pt. Croix, which must be attended to. No leading marks are necessary ; for by simply giving the shores a berth of 2 cables in every part, you may enter tho bay with safety, even with the largest ships. With a scant wind from the north-westward, this channel is preferable to the Middle Channel, as it will save a good deal of beating into the bay. The ground is not fit for anchorage until you are well within the bay. The best berth for a large ship is in 9 or 10 fms. on the eastern side of the bay, with Sandy Pt. and Little Boule Id. [Or. & R. St. liAWBiafOE.] I 58 * LOBSTER BAY. in ono. You mny nliio anohor in tho B.W. port of tho bay in 13 fmi., perfooily ■month, and land-lookod. Oaptain Hardv, of tho Savage, iiaya— •" This bny is so Hafo n shulter from wostorly uulos, tiiiit I Htrong!y iioooiiunond ovory uiuiitGr of n vosttol to run for it; tho iHhuida will suffloiontly point it out, and tho ohannola in nro oloar and bold ; wood and water may bo oaaily obtained, and tho around and Hholtor ia porfoutly good;" for ho obsorrea, " It will bo almoat totally impoasiblo for uvun a faat- aailing vo8s«il, during woaterlv [^alob, to gain ground or uiako (uiy houdway up tho 11. Ht. Lawroujo ; and a morouontman may boat about in vain, and puHsibly be too lato in attempting to run for a roadatoad, after having aplit lier auila and harraaied hor orow, for the aqualla in tho rivor aro violent, and in thiuk weather give very little warning ; but having run for tho Sovon Icls. Bay, and anehorod there, may wait safely ^r tho iirat favourable alant, and bo up at Queboo far more readily than by ooutinuing in tho river boating about." The Tide in tho bay flows till 1 h. 40 m., F. and 0. ; apring-tidoa rise ft., noapa 5 ft. Between tho woat i>oint of Antiooati and Bevon Ida.^Bay, the llivor St. Lawrence is 60 m. wide, forming a oloar open aeii, without any dangor whatever ; but to tho weatward of Seven Ida. Bay tho mainland benda to the aouthward, until it roaches 'PI. do Monta, between whioli, and tho oppoaito shore of Oapo Ohatte, tho rivor beooniea contraut(ul to about 24 m. ; the alioro is bold all the way ; but Ft. de Monta, and tho land to tho oiiatward of it, is aomowhat lower than that to tho westward, and there are but fow places whore vessels may oooasionally anohor. Ht. Margarot'a Pt. ia west, distant 12 ui. from Pt. St. Croix ; between which is St. Margaret's Bay. Nearly in the centre of the bay is the river of that name, having a bar oxtouding ^ of a milo from tho entrance ; although a large stream it only alFords aholter for boats. Ht. Margaret's Pt.'is rocky ^ of a milo off; and there ia no warning by the lead, there being no bottuiu at 08 fma. within less than 2 in. of it. Groat Cawco Id. ia S.W. by W. % W., 16 m. from St. Margaret's Pt. The coast between ia low, and bordered with small islets and rocks close in-shore ; but this part may bo apx)roachod by tho lead to 20 fma. ; the deep-aea aoundings off this part of the coast aro very irregular. Qroat and Little Cawee Ids. are nigh, and bare of trees. On the N.W. aide of Great Oawoo Id. tlwvo is a bay, in the mouth of which anchorage may bo f oimd at a cable's length from tho island ; here you will bo sheltered from W. by S. round to N.E. and easterly ; but S.W. winds blow right in, and send in a heavy sea. Tho entrance to this place is dangerous and intricate, and too small for largo ships, yet it might be of use to a vessel in distress. To enter this anchorage from tho eastward steer N.W. past the N.E. side of Groat Cawee Id., going not nearer than ^ o mile, to'avoid the shoal off the mouth of the cove, until the point of the mainland to the westward opens clear of tho north side of the island. Then steer for tho point of the mainland, keeping it midway between tho north aide of the island and the large rocks to the northward of it. When you arrive between the rocks and the island, haul into the mouth of tho small bay which you will see on tho N.W. aide of the latter, and anohor in 7 fma. at L.W. To enter thia anchorage from tho westward, the best and safest way is to pass between Little and Groat Cawee Ids., hauling close round the west point of the latter into the anchorage. Tho tides run fair through between the main and the islands, seldom exceeding 1| knot, but often less. LoBSTEB Bay.— English Pt. is S.W. by W. ^ W., 11 m. from Great Cawee Id. ; between which is Lobster Bay, a good open roadstead. The anchorage is between Sproule Pt., 5 of a milo westward of Little Cawco Id. and the Crooked Ida. The N.E. part of thia bay is an extensive flat, dry at L.W., on which plenty of lobsters are found. Here ia room sufficient for tho largeat ships. Penticoat Biver enters this bay about 1^ m. westward of tho Crooked Ids; it affords shelter for boats, lax;, perfootly , Bholter from I to run for it ; iloar and bold ; tor is porfoutly ir ovoii III fuBt- loivdwftjr up tho t)088il)ly bo too 8 and harraBwd itbor give very )rod thoro, may ar moro readily tidos riae ft., or St. Lawrence over; buttotbo , until it roaches )hatto, the river iray ; but Pt. de or thim that to lay oocasionally l)otween which is or of that name, h a largo stream f a milo off ; and fms. within less t'sPt. The coast a-shore; but this ovmdings off this is. are high, and ,ay, in the mouth island; here you . but S.W. winds lace is dangerous if use to a vessel i the N.B. side of loal off the mouth Ipens clear of the lland, keeping it ■to the northward Into tho mouth of Ir, and anchor in est way is to pass iwest point of the ihe main and the Jieat Oawee Id. ; Wage is between (rooked Ids. The Iplenty of lobsters Icost Biver enters Ihelter for boats, TRINITY BAY. — POINT DE MONTS. 69 and evon sinall vosnels ; but tho entrance is only .')0 yards wide, and the obb-tido runs out ranidly. From Iiuncu to KiigliNh Pt. in n flno, bold, sandy lM)ach. Kgg Id. is about H.S.W., 2 ni. from KngliHh Pt. It is low, narrow and without trees ; and about } of a milo long, in a N.N.E. | E. direction. The North Rks., which are alwiiys above watur, are -1 cnblos' hmgth distant N.N.B. from thu island, thence forming a black, low, narrow reof, 3 oanlos' length, in the same direction, buth towards tho main. A reuf, under wntor, runs out from these rooks in a S.S.W. direction 250 fms., leaving a very narrow channel between them and tho ialand, with only 3 fms. in it, Tho H.IZ, roof runs off cables from the N.E. part of Egg Id., an(I is tho greatest danger on tho coast between Pt. de Mouts and tho Seven Ids. ; some of tho rooks aru awash at low tides. Eg^ Id. and the roofs fonu a natural breakwater, U m. long, in a N.N.E. direction ; the north end is J of a mile from the mainland, and the southern nearly a milo. Within, and westward of this breakwater, is good anchorage ; but it is vory much narrowed by the flats nnming off tho main which, ojjposito to the N. end of Egg Id., is only about 370 fr i. The best anohorago is to tho S.W. of this narrow part, in fms., sand. As tho watc" is dee;- towards tho JHland and reefs, a ship should hav<^ a good sooiio of cablo with o wusterly wind, lost tho anchor should start, and you drive on tho rocks bciore a jecond anchor pan bo lot go; with easterly winds you drag uphill, ar^i ihero I not mv \ danj< 'r of tho unohor starting. You will lie sholtorod from N.E. winds, wit' *^^ho S.W. end of Egg Id. S.E. bv S., and the inner side of North Bks. N.E. T. ( tides are very weak, from ^ a knot to n knot. There is nothing in tho way entering this anchorage from the southv jrd, the S. end of E^g Id. being bold. If you intend running t,rr'>u^h between tiio island and the main, stand to tho northward to 8 or fms., or u-til English Pt. is o^en ^ a point to the northward of tho North Bks. ; then sioer for English Pt., giving tho inner side of the North Bks. a berth of a cable's length, until vou have passed thom I of a mile ; you may then haul out to sea, not going to the southward of S.E. by E. till clear of tho N.E. roof. Tou may run through this channel from tho eastward, by reversing the directions. Calumet Biver is 2| m. W. by S. of Egg Id. There nre reefs to the S.W. of the entrance a full mile, extending 600 fins, from tho shore. Oariboii Pt. is 6^ m. southward of this river ; on each side of this point ore sandy coves, where pilot- boats find sheltor, and often stop to look out for ships TRINITY BAYisN.E.hyE.|E.,6in.fromPt.deMont8, and 6 m.S. -westward of Caribou Pt. ; it is a safe und convenient anchorago for vessels unable to beat I round Pt. de Monts with westerly winds, and pilots are often foimd waiting hero for vessels bound upwards ; but with easterly winds they take shelter in St. I Augustine's Cove, about 1 J m. to tho wos^'i'ard of the cape. Oh the N.E. point of tho bay are also vwr iorgo rocks ; tho northern one dries to the main with spring-ebbs, but the souiii'.rri one dries nearly i of a mile to tho I southward of the point. This bay is 3 m. round, and thoro is a river falls into it, I whore good water may be obtained ; another stream may also be found about i a I milo to the westward of the W. point 'f the bay. Wood is abimdant. To sail into Trinity Bay, either from the S.W. or N.E., como not nearer either Ishoro than 16 fms. until the ba}' ..pens; then haul in, and anchor in 7 fms., with Ithe Lt.-ho. on Pt. de Monts bearing S.W. by W. i W. Small vessels may anchor lin 3 fms. just within tho reef, tho western point bearing S.W. ; and large vessels |may take a berth a litt! J farther out. POINT DE MONTS LIGHTHOUSE stands 5 m. S. -westward of Trinity Jay, and 1^ m. E.N.E. from the extremity of tho cape; it stands low down and close to the sea, is of tho usual form, 75 ft. in height, and nearly white ; the lantern lis elevated 100 ft. above the level of the sea, showing a bright fixed light, vis. Id m. A depot of provisions for shipwrecked mariners. A gun will be fired every liour during fogs or snow storms. A ledge of rocks lies off Pt. do Mohts S.W. from tho light, nnd S.E. from tho bxtremity of the point, and | a mile from the shore ; thero are only 9 or 10 ft. on r^. 60 ST. NICHOLAS HARBOUR. \. ! it. Another rock, of 2 fms., lies S.S.W., | a mile from the Lt.-ho., and a third, nearly as far o£F as the lit. to the E.S.E. These rocks are dangerous at night when rounding the Lt. in thick weather ; come no nearer to them than 15 fms. at any time. Yessels being to the eastward, in a dark night, when the land cannot he seen, should tack when the Lt. bears W.S.W., or even W. by S., if they are as near as Trinity Bay. Vessels to the westward of the Lt. should tack as soon as it bears E. J N.'; when it bears E. it will be shut in by the land. St. Augustine's Oove is 1| m. to the westward of Pt. de Monts ; it only affords shelter for boats, and pilots are often found here waiting with easterly winds. The land begins to rise considerably immediately you are to the westward of Pt. de Monts. Capt. Bayfield says : — " If the weather be clear, there will be no difficulty iu making the Lt.-ho. on Pt. de Monts ; but if the weather be thick, as it commonly is, with a ffiir wind for running up, great caution is necessary. In such circum- stances, after having run within about 15 m. of Pt. de Monts by the reckoning, sail should be reduced so as to have the vessel under complete command, and she should be rounded to, and a good deep cast with Massey's patent lead obtained, so as to insure that she is not to the N. -eastward of the point, and this should be repeated every half -hour until the Lt. be seen, or it is certain that it is passed. " If the vessel be to the N. -eastward of Trinity Bay, soundings will be obtained in less than 60 fms., from 4 to 6 m. off shore. Directly off Trinity Bay there is the same depth 3 m. off shore ; while at the same distance off Pt. de Monts, there is no bottom at 100 fms. If the distance to Pt. de Monts has been run by the reckoning without finding bottom at 70 fms., it will be almost certain that the vessel is not to the northward; but still, as the effects of currents cannot be exactly calculated, and reckonings are liable to error, it will be prudent to shape a course well to the southward of the point, till there remains no doubt of its having been passed. " The foregoing remarks apply where the object is to make the Lt.-ho. or Lt. on Pt. de Monts, wMch should always be attempted where there is any chance of success; because it is extremely desirable to obtain a fresh departure before nmning up the comparatively narrow estuary. But if the weather be so thick as to leave no reasonable hope of succeeding, or if the wind be from the southward, a course should be steered more to the southward, so as to pass well clear of the point." ST. NICHOLAS HAEBOUR.— Cape St. Nicholas, a high, bare point, bears I W. by N. 5 N., 17 miles from Pt. de Monts; and 3 miles north-eastward of the cape is St. Nicholas Harbour; this is a narrow inlet between granite hills, 500 to 700 ft. high, and runs in the direction of N.W. | N., 1| mile. This harbour is I very secure, and a, vessel might be laid on shore and repaired as if she were in a I dock. The entrance is 75 fms. wide, and within thte harbonr 190 fms. The shoals! on the eastern side of the entrance dry out so far as only to leave a channel 30 fms. | wide, with 6 ft. in it at L.W., spring-tides ; but at H.W. there are 14 to 17 ft. bottom of sand. There are some large stones which can be seen and avoided, ifl not watei enough to go over them. In the deepest part of the harbour are 9j| fms.F From Cross Pt., the western point of the entrance, the shoal water extends across I a small bay to the westward of the point 400 fms., and off shore 100 fms. Tbel anchorage between the shoals off the harbour's mouth is too much confined fori large ships, being only about 3 cables' length in width, but the ground is good,| and depth moderate ; here you may anchor and prepare for warping in. To enter this harbour from the bay, bring Cross Pt. (on which is placed a smalll wooden cross) to bear N.N.E. ; steer for it, taking care to leave it from 30 to oOl yards on your port hand ; if the wind is free enough, you must continue to run onj at the same distance from the shore, on the western side, until you deepen thel water. If, when rounding the point, you meet with bafiling winds out, you nmsti immediately run a line on shore on the western side, or drop the anchor undetf foot, and warp into deeper water. The bar, which commences at Cross Pt., continues 200 fms. within it, and the channel is rendered narrow by the shoals ofl MANICOUAOAN SHOAL. 61 0., and a third, igerous at night than 15 fms. at ihe land cannot ,., if they are as ick as soon as it ; it only affords I easterly winds, westward of Pt. 3 no difficulty in :, as it commonly In such ciroum- )y the reckoning, }nunand, and sht ntlead obtained, ,nd this should be at it is passed. B will be obtained y Bay there is the de Monts, thete is been run by the b certain that the cannot be exactly ; to shape a course lubt of its having le Lt.-ho. or Lt. on B is any chance of departure before ther be so thick as im the southward, 3as8 well clear of the eastern side. In order to have the most room, you should anchor farther in than the three large rocks which will be seen on the eastern side of the harbour. To leave this harbour you should have a N.W. wind, or take the advantage of the land breeze, or a calm morning to warp out. The best wind to enter is from W.S.W.; a S.E. wind, if blowing fresh, causes too much sea in. the entrance, and a N.W. wind blows right out. It is H.W., F. and C, 1 h. 55 m.; spring-tides rise 12 ft., neap-tides 7 ft. Water can be easily obtained on the eastern side of the harbour, or at the head of the harbour at H.W. Point St. Giles is W. by N. ^ N., 13| miles from Cape St. Nicholas ; it is high and rocky, similar to the coast to the eastward; but Manicouagan Pt., W. f S., ITj miles from the capo, is low, and thickly wooded, with a broad sandy beach extending to the westward all the way to Outward Bay. The above change in the coast line is an excellent guide to warn mariners of their approach towards the Manicouagan Shoal. The entrance to Manicouagan Bay is between the before- mentioned points, and is all dry at L.W., excepting a few narrow channels leading up the river. The ebb-tide runs out over Manicouagan Bar, to the eastward, at the rate of 1^ knot, and the flood is nearly as strong. Manicouagan Shoal is of sand, with many large boulders on its eastern and southern parts ; the easternmost point of this extensive and dangerous shoal is E.S.E., 2^ miles from St. Giles' Pt., and E. by N. § N., 5^ miles from the N.E. part of Manicouagan Pt. From the southern point of the shoal it continues to the westward, curving with the land past Outard Pt. full 16 miles, and extending from the shore from 2 to 2^ miles. Near to Outard Pt. are all sand and clay cliffs. The tide of flood and ebb sets all along the edges of this shoal, but it is not perceptible more than 5 or 6 miles off the shore. Great ripplings are frequently met with without the edges of this shoal, particularly off its southern point. Bersimis Point is S.W. by W. ^ W., 10 miles from Outard Pt., between which is Outard Bay and S. ; this river is full of shallows, and only fit for boats. Anchorage maybe had in Outard Bay, on the western side, in 14 fms., with Bersimis Pt. bearing S.W. by W., distant 3^ miles ; but the water in this bay is generally too deep for anchorage, and being open to easterly winds, cannot be recommended. Bersimis R. has sand-bars and :'hoals 1| mile without the entrance, which dry at L.W., and is, therefore, of no use to shipping. Immediately without these shoals the water becomes suddenly very deep (50 or 60 fms.) within a mile from them. This point is low, of sand, and wooded with spruce trees ; it is difficult to be seen at night, and the lead affords no warning, rendering this point very dangerous when beating up at night or in foggy weather. From the southern point of Bersimis, Pt. Mille Vache bears W.S.W., 29 miles. Jeremy Id. is 6J miles W. | N. from Bersimis Pt. ; a low sandy shore extends all the way between them. The island itself is low and rocky ; and close to the shore, on the main, within the island, is a trading post of the Hudson's Bay Company, the houses of which may be seen 6 miles distant. Just to the eastward of Jeremy Id, is a remarkable white patch in the land, which, in fine weather, looks like a church, and is a sure mark for the island. Cape Colombier is 5 miles to the westward of Jeremy Id. ; between them is a rocky and broken shore. C>ff this cape is the Gulnare Shoal, a narrow ridge of granite rock, nearly 2 miles long, running parallel to the shore, having 2 to 3 fms. over it at L.W., and very dangerous ; there are 23 fms. close to its S.W. end, and 4 to 5 fms. between it and the shore. WiWfowl Eeef is 4 miles S.W. by W. f W. from Cape Colombier ; it is a large bed of rocks, extending | of a mile from the shore. Vessels should be careful when standing in towards this part of the coast from Wildfowl Reef to the Gulnare Shoal ; 30 fms. is near enough to approach this part. Laval Bay is 4 miles to the westward of Wildfowl Reef ; it will be easily known by a rocky island off its mouth, and the clay cliffs to the S.W. of it. The bay within is all dry at L.W. Vessels may safely stand towards it, 10 fms. being 2^ miles from the shore. Off the clay cliffs there is good anchorage in 6 or 7 fms. II III-— 62 POINT MILLE YAGHE. Port Neuf ia to the south-westward of Laval Bay, and has another fur trading and fishing ostablishmont belonging to the Hudson's Bay Company; this port stands 4 miles north-eastward of Ft. Millo Vacho ; the houses and a small church can bo plainly soon from a vessel in the ofiing. About ^ of a mile H.S.E. from the church, upon u low narrow peninsula, there is a clump of pine trees; this peninsula runs N.N.E. for about 2 miles, and joins the remarkable clay cliffs before- mentioned. There are 7 to 12 ft. between the main and the peninsula at H.W. Here small vessels may find good shelter by lying aground on the sand at L.W. POINT MILLE VACHE is S.W. i W., 4 miles from Pt. Nouf ; low, sandy, and wooded with spruce trees. At this part the navigable channel becomes narrowed between the shoals off Pt. Mille Vache and Bicquotto Id., on the opposite side, to Hi miles; both sides are bold-to, and the greatest attention to the soundings, and a good look-out, are absolutely necessary to a vessel running up in dark nights or foggy weather. A revolving light is established on Bioquetto Island. Bersimis Point bears from Father Pt. (the pilots' rendezvous), N. J E., distant 2^1 miles; and from Barnaby Id., N. by E. \ E., distant 23 miles. Here vessels, with the wind at W., and a flood- tide, may cross over and engage a pilot for the river; should the wind be S.W. by W., they will do well to keep the northern land on board, until they can make certain of fetching Father Pt. The Cttbrbnt is always strong between Mill Vache and Bicquette, running to the N.E. When abreast of Pt. Mille Vache, or near it, the Id. of Bio will bearS.S.E. ^ E. The Tide flows at Mille Vache Pt., F. and C, at 2 h. 10 m. Spring-tides rise 12 ft., neaps 7 ft. THE SOUTHERN SHORE OF THE RIVER. FEOM CAPE GASPE TO THE ISLAND OF BIC. The coast of the district of Gaspe is high, bold and rugged, steep-to, and totally destitute of harbours. About 6 m. to the northward of Cape Qa8i)e is Cape Bosier, a low rocky point, the shoal water running off about | of a mile. In the bay to the southward, at the distance of If m. there is a reef runs off ^ a mile. Vessels may find anchorage here in 14 to 7 fms., sheltered by the cape from N.W. winds, but the ground is not very good. There are fishery establishments near the cape. Light. — On Cape Rosier is a white fixed light, elevated 136 ft., and vis. 16 m. ; shown from the 1st of April to the 15th of December. The tower is circular, 112 ft. high, with white stone. Griffin's Cove is N.N.W. from Cape Eosior, distant 6| m. ; it is of no use to shipping ; but fishing boats find shelter here, and the houses of the fishermen may be seen around the bay. Wood and water might be obtained here. Great Fox R. is 5 m. farther N. -westward ; it is only a small brook which enters a little bay, having i cfs off each point. Vessels might anchor off this place in the summer months. Her© is a small settlement, where wood, water and provisions might be had ; the houses will be seen on its banks. Great Pond River is N.W. f N., 16 m. from Great Fox R. It is only a small creek, affording shelter to boats ; it may be known by the houses and stages of the fishermen. Magdalen River is N.W. \ W., 24 m. from Great Pond R. The mouth of this river is on the N.W. side of a sandy bay, close under Cape Magdalen, its N.W. point, off which a reef runs S.-eastward 2 cables' length. This is a considerable stream, and sometimes visited by shallops and schooners of 80 tons ; at spring- tides 13 ft. can be carried into this river. Vessels may anchor in 7 fms., off the mouth in fine weather, at f of a mile from the sandy beach. CAPE ST. ANNE.^-CAPE CHATTE. 68 fur trading ; tbis port mnll church E. from tho is peninsula [iffs beforo- ula at H.W. a at L.W. low, sandy, nel becomes Id., on the attention to issel running on Bicquette i E., distant Here vessels, pilot for the the northern ;e, running to arS.S.E.iE. ing-tides rise aiVEB. .steep-to, and |G«8pu is Cape mile. In the ^ off I a mile, [po from N.W. "sbments near Ind vis. 16 m. ; \t is circular, of no use to ishermen may [Great Fox R. a little bay, the summer [ons might be . only a small [ind stages of nouth of this ^en, its N.W. , considerable , , at spring- fms., off the Mount St. Louis River is W.N.W., 16 ra. from the Magdalou B., and is a much smaller stream, falling into a littlu bay, a mile wide, where vessels may anchor in fine weather in from 8 to 16 fms., mud, towards tho W. side, good holding ground; but it cannot be recommended to large vessels. You may easily know when you are off this river by four large openings in the high land within the space pf 10m.; the westernmost opening is Pierre R., tho next eastward is Claude, then Mount Louis, and to the eastward G^oat Mutto R. CAPE ST. ANNE is 26 m. farther to the westward. The mountains of St. Anne commence about 12 m. S.-westward of tho cape, and continue in that direction 30 or 36 m. ; in clear weather they may be seen 80 or 90 m. ; the highest peak is 14 m. within Cape Chatte, and is 3973 ft. above the level of the sea. It is the highest land in British North America. There is a settlement at St. Anne R. about 10^ m. E. by S. from Cape Chatte, where a few families reside, who are always ready to afford the mariner assistance, if required ; but the littlo river of St. Anne, as well as that near Cape Chatte, are both barred at the entrance, and afford very little advantage to shipping ; but the former may be entered by small schooners at H.W. The latter, called Cape Chatte R., becomes dry at L.W., except one spot, where 10 ft. may occasionally be found ; these rivers are therefore littlo frequented. OAFB OHATTE is a remarkable headland, in lat. 49' 5' 52' and long. 66° 45' 13', and known by a short sugar-loaf hill ; it is the most northerly point of land (by compass) on the S. side of tho R. St. Lawrence, but the land that surrounds it, as well as that behind, is much more elevated. This shore, along tho whole extent from Cape Gaspu to Capo Chatte, although free from danger, should be particularly guarded against in dark nights, or in foggy weather, for all along it the water is too f land and the northward off tiles from shore, lom edge of the lound is all hard ^r, at the coves [y full of rocks ; Ides rise 13 ft., Jcmmost part of s. The ground lay stop in calm ; down on the lock Cove, and point out its Ids W. I S., and Is low, and well Iny of them), as Lm part of the Itemmost pilot's is due W. i 8., BIMOUSKY ROAD. 65 Light. — On^FATHEB Point is a tower of an octagonal shape, and painted white ; it stands on the extremity of the point, and shows a fixed light, elevated 43 ft. above H.W., and visible, when bearing between W. by S. 4 S., and E. i N., 10 miles. It is lighted from 10th Ai)ril to the 10th of December, of each year. RIMOUSKY ROAD.— Bamaby Island is W. J S., 3 miles from Father Pt., and between them is the Bead of Bimousky ; vessels lio here during the summer, and take in their cargoes of lumber. The best berth is in 4 or fms. at L.W., with Bimousky Church S.S.W. i W. ; the eastern point of Bamaby W. by N. ; and Father Pt. E.N.E., good holding ground. A landing pier has recently been built at Bimousky, 2,160 ft. long, and having 8^ ft. at its end, at L.W. spring- tides. There are no houses on Bamaby Id., and very little water ; ships in want of water must go to the river. The Church of Bimousky is to the eastward of the river, and there are many houses directly opposite the island. Small vessels may find shelter from westerly winds under the eastern end of this island, in from 2 to 3 fms. at L.W. Bahnaby Island is a low, wooded, uninhabited island, 3^ miles long, and very narrow. The reef off the eastern end extends about ^ of a mile, and may bo crossed in 4 fms. A 3 fms. shoal extends outside of Burnaby Id. if of a mile, and stretches into a reef at the western end, in the direction of the island, for about J of a mile. Between the western end of the island and the mainland is a largo high bare rock, about f of a mile off the island. Babnady Boad. — Small vessels may find good anchorage, in all but westerly winds, in Bamaby Boad, midway between the Bare Bk. and the western end of Bamaby Id. in 2 fms. at L.W., on muddy bottom. The rock will then bear S. and the point of the island N. The mark to sail over the tail of the reef at the western end of Bamaby is Bimousky Church in one with the eastern end of the rock ; this will lead into the anchorage. The channel inside Bamaby is dry at L.W., but at H.W. spring-tides there are 12 ft., and at neaps 7 ft., having many large stones here and there. Vessels of 7 ft. may run through safely between the island and the main, should they be caught at anchor at either end, by the wind shifting suddenly ; but it must be at spring-tides or nearly so. The tide flows at Bamaby Id., F. and C, till 2h. 16m. From Bamaby Id., Bic Id. bears W., and Bicquette W. ^ N. The first is 9 1 miles distant, and the latter 12 miles; Cape Arignole bears W. by S., distant 10 miles. Cape Arignole and the eastern end of Bic Id. lie due N. and S. of each other; the western end of the Id. Bic bearing N.W., and the eastern end of the reef, which extends S.E. from the island, N.N.E. ; the distance from the cape to the body of the island is about 2i miles. Between Bamaby and Bic Id. is the B. Ottey and Old Bic Harbour. The B. Ottey bears S.W. from Bamaby, distant about 5 miles, and is of little use to shipping, except to water at. Old Bic is to the westward of Ottey B. about 3 miles, and is a very good place for small vessels to lie sheltered from westerly winds. This harbour has two round islands, called the Bicoques, extending west- ward from the eastern point of the bay to within f of a mile of the western point; anchor midway between the westernmost island and the western side of the harbour in 3 fms. at L.W., the western point bearing W., distant J of a mile. When coming from the N.W. for this anchorage, keep the westernmost of the two round islands its own breadth open to the eastward of the W. point of the harbour ; this will lead you clear of the eastern rock off Cape Arignole Beef, the only danger in the way. Cape Arignole bears from the Harbour of Old Bic due W., and is distant about 2J miles. From the cape a reef runs out E. by N. a mile, and the eastern part of that reef, the western point of Old Bic Harbour, and the western end of the island of Bic, are in a direct line, bearing N.W. by W. 5 W., and S.E. by E. ^ E.; the distance from the eastern end of the reef to Old Bic Harbour is a mile. To the S.E. of the cape is Ha-Ha Bay, which affords excellent anchorage in easterly winds ; but as the anchorage imder Bic Id. is more roomy, the former is seldom resorted to. [G. & B. St. Lawbence.] K 66 ISLAND OP BIO. I ' i ! The high land of Bio, to the southward of Cape Arignole, is 1234 ft. above the sea, and bears S.W. by S., about 2^ miles from the N.W. point of the cape. ISLAND of BIO 18 moderately high, and well covered with trees; its length, E. and W., is about 3 miles, and it is surrounded on the E., "W., and N. sides by dangerous reefs. Off its northern shore is a woody islet, ^ a mile long, and 100 ft. high, called Bicquette; this is nearly' a mile distant from Bic Id.; there is a narrow channel for vessels between them, but it has several rocks in it, rendering it intricate and dangerous for a stranger to attempt. The best time to pass through is at L.W., when the dangers show; by keeping mid-channel between them you will have 5 to 9 fms., irregular soundings. The northern side of Bicquette is steep-to, and there are 15 fms. at musket-shot distance from it. Light. — On Bicquette Islet is a revolving light. The tower is 65 ft. high, and the light stands 112 ft. above the level of the sea. This light revolves at regular intervals of 2 minutes. A gun (a 9-pounder) is placed near the Lt.-ho., and will be fired every hour during foggy weather and snow-storms. Bicquette and Bio Eeefs. — Two reefs run off from the western end of Bicquette Islet, called the West and N.W. Eeefs. The West Reef lies in a S.W. by W. i W. direction. There are two largo rocks above water, and a third that covers at H.W. ; these extend in a line nearly a mile from the island. The N.W. Reef is the greatest danger ; it lies due W. from the western end of the island, Ij mile. The northern extreme of Cape Arignole, kept open of the western end of Bio, clears the N.W. Roof to the westward ; this reef just covers at H.W., and is bold on the northern side. The S.E. Reef of Bio runs off from the eastern end of the Id. Ij mile, in an E. by S. direction, and has three rocks at its outer part, always above water ; these rocks are bold on the N. and S. sides. The N.E. Reef of Bic is a small patch of black rocks, which shows at L.W., 400 fms. N.E. by E. from the N.E. point of the island. To clear this reef to the eastward, keep both the rocky islets on the eastern side of Old Bic Harbour open to the eastward of the S.E. Reef, bearing S.E. by S. The W. Ground of Bio extends from the western end of the island W. ^ S., nearly J of a mile, and may be approached by the lead to 5 fms. Captain Bayfield, R.N., says " There is excellent anchorage under either end of Bic, and also between it and the mainland, according to the wind ; and vessels which may meet with an easterly wind had b' tter anchor than attempt to beat down the estuary in the long and foggy nights of the fall of the year. More shipwrecks have arisen in consequence of vessels obstinately endeavouring to beat down against an easterly gale, with its accompanying fog, than from any other cause, and yet all that they may gain by such a coureo might be run in a few hours of a fair wind." The revolving Lt. on Bicquette will be of the greatest service in pointing out this anchorage at night. The tides in the Bio Channel flow, F. and C, at 2h. 15m.; springs rise 14 ft., neaps 8J ft.; its velocity at spring-tides is about 1^ knot, but strongest near the main; but between Bicquette and Green Id., the eddy flood-tide runs to the eastward. FEOM BIC ISLAND ALONG THE SOUTHERN SHORE TO ST. ROQUE. * The ALCIDES ROCK.— This is a danger on which there are only 4 ft. at L.W. ; it is situate on a shoal 100 fms. long, and about 50 fms. wide ; this small but dangerous rock is much in the way of vessels passing through the Bic Channel. It is bold-tc, and lies S.W., 3| m. from the west point of Bic, and W. ^ S., 4| m. from the N.W. point of Cape Arignole, and is about 1| m. from the soutlicrn shore. Between 6 and 9 m. to the westward of Ha-Ha Bay, there is a small rivulet, where in the spring of the year, there is a remarkable waterfall; and 4i m. farther west are the liazade Ids. . GREEN ISLAND. — NORTH AND SOUTH CHANNELS. 67 ;. above the jape, its length, N. sides by , and 100 ft. \ there is a 5, rendering imo to pass nel between lem side of pom it. ft. high, and es at regular ho., and will 3tom end of eef lies in a r, and a third island. The ■n end of the open of the just covers at 18 off from the ■ee rocks at its and S. sides, lows at Li.W., his reef to the Harbour open Ground of Bio mile, and may It either end of i; and vessels [tonipt to beat e year. More louring to beat rom any other run in a few ko in pointing l\v, F. and C, I -tides is about IGrcen Id., the SHORV. only 4 ft. at Ide ; this small le Bio Channel. |w. i s., n m. the southern . small rivulet, 4J m. farther The BAZADE ISLANDS are, strictly speaking, two large ban-en rocks, appear- ing always above water, and bearing from each other N.E. | E. and S.W. ^ W., being about 1\ m. apart; they aro about 1| m. from the shore, and there is no passage between. BASQUE ISLAND is W.S.W. ^ W. from the western Razado, distant 3^ m., and S.W. byW. | W. from Bicquette, distant about 21|m. ; it has a round appear- ance, and is covered with trees ; at present there are no houses upon it, and its northern side is bold-to. Behind Basque Id., and situate on the mainland is Troia Pistoles, a small settlement. There is no passage between this island and the south shore ; shoal water extends J a mile to the northward. There is a reef runs off the west end to the N.W. and W., 600 fms., where there is a rock that shows at half-tide. APPLE ISLANDS lie 3 m. W.S.W. \ W. from Basque Id. ; they are three barren rocky islets, the middle one being considerably the largest. It is about 40 ft. high, and 2^; m. from the main ; but there is no passage between. GREEN ISLAND is to the W.S.W. of Apple Id., from which its northern point is distant nearly 4' n. ; it thence continues in the direction of the land nearly S.W. by W. J W. and N.E. by E. | E., about 9 m. ; here, on a point that projects northward into the river, stands the Lt.-ho. There is no danger on the north side of Green Id., except the ledge off the Lt.-ho., which stretches out 1^ m. N.N.E. ^ E. from it; it is covered at H.W. spring-tides, but is steep-to and rocky. To clear Green Id. Reef by day, in clear weather, keep the high land of Bic open to the northward of Basque lA,, bearing E.N.E. f E. There is a rocky reef at the western end of Green Id., which dries for a mile; the westernmost part of this reef is there detached from the dry part, and the flood-tide sets through strongly towards Cacona. This part is only covered at quarter tide; and when sailing south-westward do not bring the Lt.-ho. on Green Id. to the northward of N.E. by E. | E. Light. — The Lt.-ho. on Green Id. is 60 ft. above the level of the sea, and exhibits a fixed Lt. from the 15th of April to the 10th of December, from sunset to sunrise, being visible about 13m., its bearings being as follow : — From Red Id. E.S.E. f S. ; White Id. E.N.E. ^E. ; the Brandy Pots N.E. by E. fE. ; Apple Id. W. by S. f S. ; Basque Id. W.S.W. ^ W. ; from the shoal at the N.E. end of Green Id. S.W. by S. ; and from the shoal at the W. end of the island N.E. by E. To vessels either going up or down the river, the Lt.-ho. will have the appearance of a ship, being very conspicuous. Beacon. — S.S.E. from the Lt.-ho., distant about ^ of a mile, there is erected a white beacon. This beacon is nearly of a square form, and when open westward of Green Id. Lt.-ho. forms a mark for the red buoy on the east end of Red Id. shoal ; when in one wilu the Lt.-ho. will clear the east end of Red Id. shoal. Note. — In order better to distinguish the channels of the River St. Lawrence, all the buoys on the north side are painted red, and those on the south side are painted black, with the following exceptions, viz. : — W. end of Madame Id. shoal, a red buoy. W. end of Beaujeu Bk., a white buoy. E. end of the patch, east of Beaujeu Bk., a white buoy. Patch in the Traverse, chequered white-and-black buoy. W. end of Hare Id. Bk., a red buoy. E. end of the Middle Shoal off the south side of Hare Id., a white buoy. Barrett's Ledge, a chequered white-and-black buoy. E. end of Hare Id. north Reef, a black buoy. ' * E. end of Red Id. Reef, a red buoy. NORTH AND SOUTH CHANNELS.— It may be proper to remark here, that from the east part of Red Id. Reef to the west part of Hare Id. Reef, a distance of 30 m., the river is, by these islands and reefs, divided into two channels ; that to the south-eastward is the one most commonly frequented, the other to the north-westward having strong tides, deep water, and no good anchorage. The North Channel is without buoys or Lts., excepting off the entrance to the River 08 RED ISLAND. — ^WHITE ISLAND. Paguonay ; but in the South Channel a vessel can anchor almost anywhere above Groon Id., at any time when it may be necessary. BED ISLAND.— This is a low, flat, reddish-looking island, without trees, and not above 20 ft. above the level of H.W. It is surrounded with shoals, except its S "W. side, which is bold; but the rocky reef at its east end runs N.E., 2* m. Tou may anchor in 10 fms. S.E. of this latter reef, in good holding ground. This island is situate nearly in the middle of the river, bearing from Green Id. Lt.-ho. N.W. by "W. J W., distant 6^ m. ; while the outer or eastern extremity of the reefs about it bears from the same Lt.-ho. N.W. by W. f W. Light.— The Lt.-ho. on Bed. Id. shows a red fixed Lt., 75 ft. above H.W., and visible 12 m. The Lt.-ho. is also coloured red. Beacon. — On the south point of Bed Islet is a beacon. Buoys. — A red buoy on the east end of the reef in 6^ fms., with the south side of Bed Islet in one with the north side of Hare Id. ; the beacon on Green Id. open a Mttle to the westward of the Lt.-ho., S.S.E. f E. Also a red buoy on the west end of the islet in 2} fms., with the Lt.-ho. on Bed Islet E. by N. J N. ; the beacon on Bed Islet in one with the S.W. comer of the keeper's dwelling-house. CACONA is the high bluff land S.S."W. -om the S.W. end of Green Id. ; the water between is deep. At 2 m. S.W. by W. from the peninsula of Cacona, and 1 m. from the land, are the Perc^e Bks. ; these form two clusters, about 1| m. in extent, and are almost covered at H.W. ; but there is a narrow passage to the southward of them, with 3| fms. You will always go clear of them to the north- ward, by keeping in not less than 8 fms. Beacon. — Parish of Cacona, on the S. side of channel, and painted white, nearly of a square form ; when open to the eastward of the church, forms a cross mark for .the black buoy on the E. end of Hare Id. North Bet'f ; when open to the westward of the church, forms a clearing mark for the same reef. BIVEB LOTJP is Sf m. S.W. ^ S. from Cacona, and 6 m. S.E. J E. from the Brandy Pots, and is a considerable stream ; boats can ascend it a mile, except at L.W. A pier has been constructed, 1667 ft. in length, with 16 ft. at its end in the lowest tides. It is 96 m. below Pt. Levi, and near it is the terminus of the Pt. Levi and Montreal Railway. The anchorage off Loup Biver is better sheltered than that of the Brandy Pots with easterly winds, also with S.W. winds, but the riding is heavy with a northerly gale. BAEBETT'S LEDGE is two detached rocks. On the western rock is a chequered black-and-white buoy. These rocks are distant from each other ^ of a mile, on a W. by S. line of bearing; the N.E. rock has 10 ft. over it, and the S.W. rock only 12 ft., while between them are 8 fms. The leading mark through this part of the channel, leaving the Barrett's Ledge and Middle Shoal to the northward, and Percee Bocks and Pilgrim Shoal to the southward, is Green Id. Lt.-ho., just shutting in with the S.W. point of the island, N.E. f B. Buoy. — ^Barrett's Ledge Buoy is chequered black-and-white, in 6 fms., and middle of channel, with the diamond beacon on Hare Id. in line with the eastern extremity of the Brandy Pots ; the S. side of the southernmost mountain of Kamouraska in line with the S. point of Great Pilgrim Id. WHITE ISLAND.— This is a small island S.W. \ W. from Bed Id., distant 9| m., being round and covered with trees. A reef of rocks extends N.E., full 5 m. from the E. end of Hare Id., drying to about half that distance. Midway between the Bed Id. and this reef are 20 and Id fms. Buoy. — On the E. end of Hare Id. North Beef a black btioy, between the N. and S. channels, with the beacon in the parish of Cacona open to the eastward of Cacona church ; the S. side of White Islet in one with the N. side of Hare Id. This beacon open to the westward of the church leads to the eastward of the E. end of Hare Id. North Reef. HABE ISLAND is S.W. J S., distant only I j ra. from White Id.; thence it extends to the S.W. | W., 7 ra., in no part exceeding in breadth a mile, but in places not equalling ^ a mile. BRANDY POTS. — THE PILGRIMS. 69 here above t troos, and , except its !J.E., 2J m. )und. This Id. Lt.-ho. aity ol the I H.W., and ^e south side Ben Id. open .-ho. on Red •omer of the reenld. ; the Cacona, and )0ut li m. in lassage to the to the north- white, nearly a cross mark L open to the I E. from the nile, except at its end in the ms of the Pt. > Brandy Pots leavy with a is a chequered )f a mile, on a .W. rock only lis part of the irthward, and Lt.-ho., just 6 fms., and th the eastern mountain of J distant 9|m., Ifull 6 m. from r between the Itween the N. le eastward of L of Hare Id. lard of the E. td. ; thence it mile, but in Beacons. — Two beacons, both painted white, are erected on Hare Id., about 2 m. from the N.E. end, one of diamond form, the othor square. The diamond beacon in one with the eastern extremity of the Brandy Puts, forms a cross mark for the chequered buoy on the W. rook of Barrett's Ledge ; the square one, when open to the westward of the Brandy Pots, forms a cross mark for the white buoy on the Middle Shoal, E. end of Middle Bank. BRANDY POTS S. by W., Urn. from the E. end of Hare Id., is the southernmost of some small islets, called the Brandy Pots. These islets are close together, the northern one being high, and covered with trees ; the southernmost is a whitish rook, nearly barren : they are each about A a mile lonp:, N.W. and S.E. of each other, the ground between them drying at L.W. ; they lie nearly J of a mile from the S. side of Hare Id., with only a passage for boats between. A little to the E. of the northern Brandy Pot is the Noggin, a small islet covered with trees ; at L.W. these are connected by a chain of rocks, leaving a passage only fit for boats. Halfway between the Noggin and the E. end of Hare Id. is a reef of rooks, which dries at L.W. ; it lies close to Hare Id., and therefore not in the way of shipping, and by keeping in 7 fms. you will also go clear. Light.— Brandt Pots Liohthotjse is brick, sheeted with iron, stands 42 fms. from the S.E. end of the islet, and shows a fixed Lt., elevated 78 ft., vis. 10 m. To the westward of the Brandy Pots, the S. side of Hare Id. has a flat of hard ground extending from it, being 4 m. long, and nearly ^ a mile broad. The whole of this side of the island is boimded by rocks. MIDDLE SHOAL. — S. -westward of Barrett's Ledge, and between Hare Id. and the mainland, is a shoal called the Middle Shoal ; its N.E. end begins where the Brandy Pots bear N.W., distant 2 m.; it runs S.W. by W. from thence about d m. The least water on its N.E. part is IC ft., on which a white buoy has been placed. On its middle are 3 fms., and on its western end 4 fnis. The anchorage upon it is good in fine weather. Buoy. — The buoy on the Middle Shoal is white, in 10 ft. and middle of the channel, with the square beacon on Hare Id. open to the westward of the Brandy Pots ; the S.W. end of Hare Id. in one with the summit of Ebeulemens mountains. HARE ISLAND BANK. — This is a long shoal beginni) g about a mile above the W. end of Hare Id., and running up in a S.W. by W. direction, full 9 m. ; a considerable part of it becomes dry at L.W. : this dry part is about 2^ m. in extent, and lies on the northern part of the bank ; it is covered with grass and spruce bushes, and is about 2^ m. S.W. from Hare Id. There is good anchorage on the S. side of this bank in 7 fms. The E. end of the bank (on which a red buoy is placed) bears from the E. end of the Pilgrims N.N.W., 3 m., and from the Lt.-ho. on the Pilgrims N. by E. ^ E. ; the ban^ thence extends S.W. f W., 9 m. to the western end (where there is another red buoy). About § of a mile eastward of the eastern red buoy is another knoll, of 3 fms. ; there is a narrow channel between the S.W. end of Hare Id. and the bank, with 3^ to 4 fms. in it. From the E. end of Hare Id. Bank, a narrow bank, with only 3| to 4 fms. on it, at L.W., extends to the N. -eastward 5 m., to the Middle Shoal, on which a white buoy (before mentioned) is placed ; between this bank and the island are from 10 to 18 fms. Heavy ships should not attempt to cross the Middle Bank at L.W. spring-tides. Buoys. — ^Hare Islaio) Bane. On the knoll at the E. end of Hare Id. Bank, a red buoy, in 3 fms., on the N. side of channel ; with the S. side of Hare Id. and the middle oi White Id. in one ; the W. end of Hare Id. N.W. i W. Also a red buoy off the W. end of Hare Id. Bank in 4 fms., between the channels ; with the two beacons in one on the E. end of Grande Id. of Eamouraska ; the N. sides of Hare Id. and Hare Id. South Beef touching. The PILOBIMS are five islands connected together by reefs, that become dry at L.W. ; they occupy a space of about 4| m., and are distant 1^ m. from the main; but there is no passage between them and the S. land. The N.E. end of Great Pilgrim bears from the Brandy Pots S. by W. J W., distant 7 m., and from the S.W. end of Hare Id. S.E. by S., distant 4^ m. ; this is the highest island, and covered with trees, the others appear white and barren. The S.-westemmost, or 70 KAMOURABKA ISLANDS. Jionp T(l., linn in tho clirootion of S.W. and N.E. ; its W. ond boaw from tho W. end of Tlaro Id. S. by W., rt m. Thoy aro all bdld-to on tho north(*m sido. Light. — LoNO rit,OHiM LlOHTlioTJSE iH cinnilar bricjk, Nhootod with iron, and HtiitKU) 20 fills. W. of tlio centre of tho iMland, and iVI fnis. H. from tlio wator'H o, and showH aflxod Yinhi, clovatod 180 ft., vi8. 12 ni. Pll-oiiiM Shoal is a narrow bank, about 4 m. in length without tho odjifo of tho Loup Hank ; it ban from 12 to Ifl ft. upon it ; its W. end iH'abroaHt of tlio middlo ot tho Pilgrims. Tbo N. oxtromity of this shoal is marked by a blaok buoy. Tho leading mark through botwoon Pilgrim Rhoal and Haro Id. is tho N. sido of Burnt Id. just open of Qrando Id., bearing S.W. ^ W. Buoy. — On tho northern oxtn>mity of tho Pilgrim Shoal a blaok buoy in 4 J fms. on tho southern sido of tho channel, with tho wostorn ond of Haro Id. and tho wostom end of Oroat Pilgrim in lino N.N.W. i W., and 8.S.E. ^ E., tho western ond of Br and y Pots and Whito Id., touching. XAMOUBASKA ISLANDS.— These are a oolleotion of small islands off the soutlioni side of tho river, between tho Pilgrims and Cape Diablo, and in front of the church and sottlenumt of Kamotiraska. Tho Groat or N.E. Id. boars from tho Wi'stern Pilgrim S.W. by W. j^ W., distant (5 miles; there is a bank extending from one to the other, with 2 fms. upon it, called tho Bank of St. Andre ; its norther'", odgo is steep-to ; tho second is called Burnt Id., and is to tho westward of Great Id. Crow Id. is S.S.w. from tho western end of Burnt Id., distant 5 of n milo ; thoro aro also two lessor islands at tho inner sido of Burnt Id. These islitnds occupy a space of 3 miles, and aro about 1 J milo from shore, tho bank drying at L.W. Great and Burnt Ids. aro both bold and steep-to on tho northern sido ; but Crow Id. has shoal water iiround it, and boars from Kamouraska Church N.W., distant J of a mile ; betwoon is a safe landing-placo. After passing Kamouraska, tho odgo of tho soutlicrn bank may bo easily followed, in 7 fms., or in 10 fms., with a largo ship, up to St. Anno Bay. Light. — Kamouraska Light on Grande Id. Tho tower stands 1 20 fms. from the N.E. end of tho island, and bi) fms. from tho water's odgo, and shows a fixed light, elevated IfiC) ft. Beacons. — On the Groat Id. of Kamouraska, on the southern sido of tho channel, aro two beacons, one rod and one wliito. Thoy boar N. \ W. and S. { E. of each other, and, when in one, form a cross mark for tho red buoy on the S.W. end of Haro Id. bank in 4 fms. From Crow Id. Cape Diablo bears S.W. J W., distant nearly 3 miles ; but from the capo, in tho direction of Crow Id., runs a rocky reef, tho easternmost part of which is covered at a quartor-flood. At 2^ milos above Cape Diable is Pt. St. Denis, to the southward of which is a little cove. There is good riding opposite this cove at 1:J milo from the siiore, in from (5 to 8 fms. At Point Origoneaux, 2 milos W. by 8. from Capo Diable, a landing pier has been built 1200 ft. in length, with 15 ft. depth of^ water at tho pier-nead at L.W. spring-tides. The land from St. Denis bears S.W. to Pt. Oucllo, and is all low, with rocks scatter od before it. Pt. Quelle has a rocky reef attached to it, which stretches out west and south-westerly. All tho way to St. Eoquc* large stones aro scattered throughout this mud-bank. Rounding this point you will open tho River Quelle, on the eastera banks of which is a church and settlement ; from Capo Diable to Pt. Quelle the distance is 8 m. Nearly 8 m. to the south-westward of Pt. Quelle is Pt. Roque. A sand-bank stretches out from this latter point full 4 m., and continues full that distance from tho shore, to the eastward, as far as Pt. Quelle ; near the north extremity of this bank, and N.N.W. , about 4^ m. from Cape Roque the Lt. -vessel is moored, which must bo always L ft on the port or south side, when bound upwards. Between Pts. Quelle and St. Roquo is an extensive bay, commonly known by the name of St. Anne Bay ; it is shallow all over, for a i sandy-flat, beginning at Pt. Quelle, extends itself so far as the bay c . St Roquo ; this flat is studded with sunken rocks, and is very dangerous. rom tbo W. h iron, nnd ivtor'H o«ljj;t', odgo of tlio I tho middlo buoy. TUo ido of Burnt oyin4jf>""' Id. and tho tbo wostoni innds off tho id in front of [jars from tho [ik oxtonduiB t. Andre; itH tho westward ; Id., distant of Burnt Id. om shore, tho ;oop-to on tho iiKaniouraska After passing I, in 7 fni8., or 1 20 f ms. from I shows a fixed side of tho . and S. \ E. )y on the 8.W. lies; hut from mmost part of able is Pt. St. iding opposite nding pier has pior-boad at ow, with rocks — vhicb stretches H are scat cored ) Eivor Quelle, liipo Diablo to 1 of Pt. Quelle full 4 ni., and as Pt. Quelle ; m Cape Eoque I or south side, [extensive bay, ill over, for a c . StRoquo; n FROM. POINT MILLE VACHE ALONG THE NORTHERN SHORE TO COUDRES ISLAND. The northern shore of tho river, from Pt. Millo Vaeho to Coudros Id., is bold iind muuntainouM, Tiie granito IiiilH, in most parts riso imnitnliately from tho river; those near tho Saguonay are about 1000 ft. in height; but Mount Eboule- mens, near Gooso Capo is 2.") 17 ft. in luught. Tho course and distanuo across tho Bay of Millo Vacho to Esquimino Islets, is i^.W. by W. about 11 i miles; those islot'^ nmsist of two largo rocks, ha ing thruo small ones nearly a mile S.W. of them, in om them to tho ontrauco of Saguonay R. Uio course is nearly S.W. by W., 22 miles. Little Bergeron is 10 miles from tlio iOsquiminos, between whicli tho coast is clear, excepting a flat which ocoupios a bay on tho western side of Capo Bondesir ; but this lies so close in as to bo littlo in tho way, and there arc 50 fins, very near tho rocks on this part of tho coast. Great and Littlo Bergeron are two coves only separated by a point ; they are full of rocks, and dry at L. W. Pt. Vacho, tho eastern point of Saguonay R. entrance, is miles S.W. of Little Bergeron. The high clay cliffs at this point, named Saguonay Olitt's, may bo readily known ; you may anchor with those cliffs bearing W. by S., distant ;{ milos, in 7 fins., with tho S.W. end of Green Id. and Red Islot in ono, nearly a milo off shore ; but immediately without this you fall into doop water. Buoys. — (1). Vaciies Patch. — A reef of rocks dries out i a milo from "Vachos Pt., and tho shoal stretches S.W. by W,, I J milo from tho point to Vaohes Patch, on which a black buoy is placed in 13 ft., to bo left on the right hand when entering tho Saguonay. Tho marks for this buoy are, tho beacon on Hot Pt. just open to the westward of tho beacon on Rouge Pt., and Lark Pt. just open to tho southward of the beacon on Lark Id. (2.) Qutor Patch is nearly a mile to tho southward of tho former, and near tho eastern end of tho Bar Reef. It is marked by a chequered black-and-whito buoy in 3 fms., to bo left on your port hand when entering the Saguonay. Its marks are White Id., half its breadth shut with the north side of the Brandy Pots, and N.W. Company's house in tho Harbour of Tadoupac, just shut behind Rouge Pt. This outer patch is sometimes called tho Prince Shoal. Lark Pt. bears from it W. by N., and tho black buoy on Vachos Patch N. by W. ; tho western side of Brandy Pots and White Islet in a line, which clears Lark Reef, load on this shoal. Brandy Pots should, therefore, be kept oi)on to tho eastward of, or just touching. White Islet, S.W. by S., which wil' load about^ a mile to tho eastward of tho shoal. L<\.UK Point is tho S.W. point uf the entrance of Saguonay ; it lies S.W., 2J m. from Pt. Vacho, and is composed of low clay cliff's. E.N.E. a milo from the point is Lark Islot, low and small. LARK REEF, dry at L.W., extends 3.^ m., in a S.S.E. direction from the point. Between this extensive roof, and those running otf J j m. S.E. from Pt. Vache, is the entrance to Saguenay Rivor, which has a depth of 12 to 18 fms. midway between tho two shoals; but just within tho entrance, it suddenly deepens to 100, and a littlo farther up to 150 fms. Buoy. — Qii tho extreme S.W. point of Lark Reef, a white buoy is placed in 4i fms., on tlio north side of tho channel, with lied Id. Lt.-ho. E. f S. ; and tho beacon on tho N.E. bank of tho Harbour of Tadousac in one with the diamond beacon on Lark Id. Beacons at the entrance of the River Saguenay. — Tho first is placed on llie N.E. bank of Tadousac Harbour on tlic N.E. side of channel and coloured white. When in ono with tho boacon on Lark Id. forms a mark for the white buoy ou tho S.W. extremity of Lark Reef. On Hot Pt., River Saguenay, a beacon Avith a diamond Hd., painted white ou tho N.E. side of channel, and ono on lloquo 72 MURRAY LAY. — OOOWt' AiE. li tVo S.a. Bido of channel. Hot I't. fonuH a mark on Pt. with a triangle on top, »nd oolourod whito, alno Tlio latter when open to the ouHtwurd of tliu bencoii for the bliwk buoy on Yaobos Patch. On Lark Islet, a three-aided beacon painted white, on the B.W. aide of the chiinnel. When open to the northward of Lark Pt. forms a murk for the black buoy on VaohoN Patch ; and in one with the diamond boacon on the N.E. bank of Tadouaac Harbour, forma a mark for the white buoy on the S.W. extreme of Lark Ueof. Tide. — In working up between the Eaquiminos and Red Islet Beef, obaervn the flood does not extend above 5 or m. from the north ahore ; therefore keep within that diatunoo. The tides here are regular, and off Bergeron apring-tidos run 2 to 'A knots. Should you be auddenly caught to the northward of Rod Islet Reef by a shift of wind to the euatwiird, so that you cannot fotch round tho E. end of the reef and gain the Houth Channel, you may safely boar up and run to the westward, by givinir Red Id., White Id., and Uure Id., with its roofs, u berth of 2 m. on your jiort hand, in passing. When you are 10 m. to the westward of Hare Id., you may saftily haul across for the South Channel. ObHorve, that by keeping Kamourasica Church just open to the westward of Grande Id. , bearing 8. by W. i W., you will clear the S.W. end of Hare Id. Roof, on which a rod buoy is placed, in 3 fms. As the river is all clear to the westward, there is no necessity for hauling across so near to the reef. There is anchorage along the N. side of Hare Id., in U to H fms., but this is pretty close in. Ca^e Basque is (ij m. S.W. of Lark Pt. ; about 1| m. to the northward of the capo IS Eohafaud Id., small and rooky, before a cove full of rocks. Basque Roads is directly oft' this cove, and between the cape and Lark Reef ; here is very good anchorage, sheltered from easterly winds, with Eohufuud Id. bearing W.N.W. rather less than o mile. Here is room for a number of ships to lie in 10 or 11 fms. : in this depth the tide is not strong, and the holding ground good. From hence to Murray Bay there is no good anchorage on the N. shore. The Bay of Rocks is 2| m. S.W. of Cape Basque; it only affords shelter for boats. About 3 m. farther is Cape Dogs, bold and high, and of bare granite. Cape Salmon bears S.W., 9\ m. from Cape Dogs, and is sirailar to it ; Black R. and Port Parsley is between them. Port Solmon is IJ m. to the westward, and will admit large boats at H.W. The Bottloments on the N. shore are continuous from here along the coast to Quebec. Capo Eagle is 6^ m. S.W. by W. J W. from Capo Salmon, and is of the same character. Murray Bay is W. by S. of Capo Eagle, distant 6 J m. ; it is about 1^ m. wide, about the same depth, and nearly all dry at L.W. ; a rapid and unnavigable rivor falls into it. There is a church and village round the head of the bay ; and the settlement extends some miles back. On this river are grist and saw mills ; at the latter, quantities of deals are cut, and shipped in small vessels for Quebec. Vessels occasionally anchor oflF here, and take in lumber ; with Pt. Pique, its E. point, W. by N., 400 fms. ; Pt. Gaze, its W. point, S.W. ;i W. ; and Pt. Heu, E.N.E. i E., in 10 or 12 fms., good holding ground, and tides easy. Mai Bay lies between Murray Bay and Capo Goose. Here, at 60 m. below Quebec, a pier has been built 475 ft. in length, with 18 ft. water at the pier-head, at low spring-tides. Gooso Cape is S.W. J S., 8^ m. from Pt. Qazo, the W. point of Murray Bay; it is bold and rocky. Midway between is Mai Bay, in which there is no good anchorage. Cape Martin is 3 m. W. by S. from Goose Cape ; between them is good anchorage, well sheltered from easterly winds. Vessels anchor in 7 fms., with Grosse Rk. bearing N. by W. (Grosse Rk. is about midway between the capes). Here you will bo sheltered from the tides, which run past Gooso Cape with great rapidity, often occasioning great ripplings. At EboiUemens, 53 m. below Quebec, and 3 or 4 m. W. of Cape Goose, a landing- pier has been built, 920 ft. in length, with 9^ ft. water at the pier-head at low spring-tides. of obannol. foriuH u mark 1, side of tho for tho blauk ho N.E. bunk iV. extreme of f, observn tho [loroforo koop 1 spring- tides f by a shift of tho roof and wcstwurd, by 2 ni. on your Elaro Id., you by keeping S.byW.iW., ' is placed, in y for hauling Hare Id., in hward of tho Basque Koads > is very good :ing W.N.W. 10 or 11 fms. : From hence [s shelter for bare granite, it ; Black B. est ward, and re continuous W. J W. from t IJ m. wide, ivigable river bay ; and tho mills ; at the ebec. Vessels its E. point, E.N.E.JE., 60 m. below he pier-head, uray Bay ; it 3 is no good 76GD. them is or in 7 fms., between the t Goose Cape le, a landing- -head at low :LTi'!.r.---- — . 78 OOXJSSSg ZBLAWn • — -""iiwoju. »g S.W^by w'^i'^^^f « ">• long, and 2* ^A .. „ " '"'''' ^"*^"'ve h;he eastern ke whole of [N.E. i E. lof this low )eu Bk., on Jbhe island, Ind close to Imes rocky, |e way, and Ivated, and \t^B, mile, is Beaujeu Bk., having on its shoalest part not more than 6 ft. over it ; it is separated from the flat that rtms off the main by a channel, having 4 or 5 fms. in it ; but just within the western entrance of this channel is a knoll of only 12 ft. The channel between Beaujeu Bk. and the eastern end of Crane Id. has 4 to 5 fms. in it, but its breadth scarcely exceeds ^ of a mile. On the N.W. side of this channel a red buoy is placed, opposite the white buoy on the western end of the Beaujeu Bk. Beacons on Goose and Orane Islands.— (1). A three^sided beacon on the meadows of Goose Id., coloured white, and on the northern side of the channel, when in one with Onion Id., forms a cross mark for the white buoy on the patch E. of Beaujeu Bank. (2). A diamond-shaped beacon on Crane Id., about 1| cable's length to the S.W. of Macpherson's house, when in one, form a cross mark for the white buoy on the western end of Beaujeu Bank. (3). A diamond beacon on Crane Id., 1 cable's length to the eastward of the red beacon (next noticed). These two beacons are both white, and the latter when in one with the red beacon, forms a mark for the black buoy on the northern extremity of the Bank of St. Thomas. (4). A red beacon on the southern point of Crane Id., and a white beacon about 1 cable's length to the westward of the red beacon. These two beacons in one, form a mark for the red buoy on the western extremity of Crane Id. Spit, and like the former, are on the northern side of the Channel. They are nearly of a square form. Buoys on the Beaujeu Bank. — (1). On the eastern end of the patch, E. of Beaujeu Bk., a white buoy, in 3 fms. in mid-channel. Marks — the beacon on the meadows of Ooose Id. in one with the centre of Onion Id. ; the southern side of Crane Id. S.W. by W. ^ W. (2). On the western end of Beaujeu Bk., a white buoy, in 3 fms., in mid-chaimel. Marks — ^the two white beacons on Crane Id. in one; Stone Pillar Lt. -ho. open two or three sails' breadth to the southward of Goose Id. reef. Buoys on Crane Island side of Channel. — (1). The first of these is a red buoy, in 4 fms., on the edge of Goose Id. shoal, to be left to the northward. Marks— Onion Id. N.W. ; south side of Crane Id. S.W. | W. (2). A second red buoy, in 3§ fms., on the southern side of Crane Id., to be left to the northward. Marks — Macpherson's house N. ^ E.; St. Ignace Church touching the eastern end of the Peninsula. Light. — Crane Island. — The tower is wood, 39 ft. high, and stands 80 fms. from the western end of the island ; it shows a fixed light, elevated 44 ft. From the western end of Crane Id. a reef of rocks extends 3 a mile, drying at L.W. ; and a shallow spit runs out I3 mile farther westward, on which is a red buoy. The Southern Shore. — In following the southern shore from St. Eoque Pt., you will see the Church of St. Jean, standing on a projecting point. About 6^ miles distant from the church is L'Islet, and between these is Port Jolie and Three Saumons R., fit only for small craft. At L'Islet a landing pier has been built 1,200 ft. in length, with 8^ ft. at the pier-head at L.W. Farther on is the church and telegraph of St. Ignace ; this latter is to the southward of Beaujeu Bank, from which it is distant nearly a league. The shore all the way from St. Eoque Pt. to St. Thomas's E. is lined with a sandy flat of 3, 2, and 1 fm. The country about here has a very pretty appearance, being thickly covered with white-washed houses and village churches. Beacons.— (1, 2). Parish of St. Jean. — ^Two beacons to the S.E. of the church, both white, and on the southern side of the channel. The diamond beacon, when in one with the church, forms a cross mark for the chequered buoy on the Channel Patch. The other, when in lin^ with the church, forms a cross mark for the black buoy on St. Jean Patch. At 4| miles to the south-westward of Beaujeu Bk., and about the same distance from St. Ignace, is the entrance to St. Thomas's or South E. From this land a 76 MIDDLE CHANNEL. flat or mud-bank oxtondf* moro than hnlf-way to Orane Id. ; it is namod 8t. Thomas's Bk.; its northern extremity bears S.W. by W., distant 1^ mile from the southern point of the island; it is a dangerous bank, and chiefly dries at It.'W., and marked by a black buoy. Thb Wyb Books are immediately above the Bank of St. Thomas. This bank lies in the direction of H.W. by W., and is about ^ of a mile long ; over its western end are only 4 ft., and over its eastern end ft. The marks for the rocks are the Sominairo, on the northern shore, in lino with the eastern point of Beaux Id., and Orow Id. just open to the westward of Middle Id. The Belle Ohasso Bks. are two remarkable rooks, 0| m. to the westward of the Wye Rks., f of a mile from the shore, and about a mile W.N.W. from Berthier Ohuroh ; behind them is a small sandy cove, with somo rooks running off the west point. At Borthior, 20 m. below Quebec, a pior has been built, 087 ft. in length, with 15 ft. depth of water at the pior-head at low springs. St. Valioro Church Ntands 4 m. to the westward of Berthier, and bears from the Ohurch of St. John, on the Id. of Orleans, S.E., distant 4 m. The ground from St. Valiere's Ft. is foul, and affords no safe anchorage all the way to Quebec. Light. — Belle Oiiassb Lt. is shown from a wooden tower at the east end of the island. The Lt. Is fixed, elevated 70 ft. above H.W. Beacon. — Parish of St. Valiere; one beacon on south side of channel, painted white, and when in one with the church forms a cross mark for t^o S.W. end of Madame Reef, in 6 fms. The Church of St. Micliivol stands 5 m. to the westward of Pt. St. Valiere ; and 6 m. farther wostwanl stands the Church of Beaumont, which is opposite to St, Lawrence Pt., on Orleans. Beaumont Reef is an extensive rocky reef, extending half-way across the river from the south shore toward St. Lawrence Pt. ; it dries at L.W., is uneven, dangerous, and stoop-to, having 8 to 10 fms. close-to. A black btioy is placed on the northern edge pf this shoal. From Beaumont the coast runs W. by N., 7 m. to Pt. Levy. Buoys between the west end of Crane Id. and Quebec. — (1.) On the west ond of Crano Id. shoal, a rod buoy, in 3 fms. on the north side of channel. Marks — tho two beacons in sugar-loaf forms, on the south side of Crano Id. in ono ; Middlo and Cross Ids. in one. (2.) On tho west ond of Margaret's Tail a red buoy, in 2J fms., with the south side of Margaret Id. N.E. by E., on north side of channel. (;j.) On tho oast ond of Grosso Patch a white biioy, in 2J fms. in mid-channel, with tho nortli sido of Margarot Id. N.E. by E. J E. (4.) On a rock in tho Quarantine Ground, a chinjuered black-ard -white buoy, in 7 fins., on north sido of channo!. Tlio buoy is placed on tho north sido of tho rock, with tiie S.W. point of Grosso Id. W.S.W. (a.) On the west ond of Madamo Id. roef, a rod buoy, in St fms. in mid-channel, t.*'. between tho junction of the South Channel and the North Traverse \vith St. Valiere Church S. ^ E. ; a house on tho west ond of Rpaux ^A., just open to the northward of Madame Id. (6.) On the south sido of tho channd there is a blaok buoy on slw north extreme of the Bk. of St. Thomas, in 2 fms. «rith tun red .sugar-loaf an«J •"hito diamond beacons, on tho south point of Crane Id. in one : ! former hcs Id. and the banks which extend from its west end U Sumt Os^ Led^i , imf- . sle Reaux, and on tho south sido by the Middle Ground 'M^I Ids and reeff, and tho chain of islands and reefs extending from Goose Id. to Mwgaart Id.; ioere are several entrances between th(> islands. To the northward of th»^ Seal Ids. there are only 3 fms. at L.W. This channel, having neither buoys nor beacons, is not used by the pilots ; but most of the channels between the islands are used by the small coa.sting veiisels. is namod St. milo from the Iries at L.W., B. This bank or its wostem rooks are the eaux Id., and itward of the rom Berthior g off tho west ft. in length, alioro Church I of St. John, ftliere's Pt. is tie east end of nnol, painted s S.W. end of Valiere: and pposite to St. ef, extending Pt. ; it dries )-to. A black he coast runs On tho west I of channel. Crane Id. in ith the south mid-channel, -whito buoy, h Hide of tho uiid-channol, erse with St. open to the orth oxtreme lite diamond in one with ^tm) a black h j«Mt open 'S-mdres ifP', mtt Iflle >ef«, and the 1 ; here are 1 Ids. there icons, ia not used by the commonly used • t\^u^^* "ow very \iH^. * 77 W should bo kepj IZ: "irs '!» ot a mile from --», »uu cne floods 6 whinC ^' '^"'»>n Uoudros th.r^i.u ""'^''' ai. for "£''''X»fem point of 86 fflfc, '""'."« ""'riy } about a mUeNv^^^^^^^^^^ the shorn % il ^^^'^^-^^twari of pf ^?.*° ^^^ alsotbo banks Nj^'*i'««^>«"n«I " buoyed C^,.^«J"g, about 2.C f^!^!?^"* tb« south ^'^e of fia""'"^ «» tb«7atSr mtrt ^^ l! ^■^' ^"^ ofXa'f J? farrows between thefc'- c^^'« Part is aleo^t o i:" ^^^'T^^-^. and wj?^**"^^ y«u ^H West Sand is r! !;f- ^^^'^ «nd the WeattJr- i^^"^^' and f rom 4 ?„ «'."'• °^ *be bearings 1 wS'"'"" ^'^««'b just shuf f ' ..?« "^ark for S. l^f^"^'' '^^^P. of Tm.-I,„„d, ti"',™' *» o««t end of the BraI6 Rl, • . . «a,.oT„„„,„„„„^.«"^«,e west end „, S:^^ Slp^"'^-^^" <:h^ ..t ^i "6 fcj. f E., aad I 78 BAYFIELD ISLANDS. — ISLAND OP ORLEANS. ,* ■I (2.) A black buoy on the N.W. side of the Brul£ Bk. in 3 fms., with the east end of Margaret Id., and west end of Two-heads Id. touching, bearing S.E. by E. j E. ; the two buoys to be left on the port hand going up. (3.) A rod buoy on the E. end of the Traverse Spit, in 3 fms., with the S.W. Soint of Two-heads Id., on with a distant blue hiU, bearing B.E. by E. ^ B. : the r. end of Margaret Id. being at the same time just open to the westward of Two- heads Id. Grosse Id. S.S.E., to be left on the starboard hand going up. (4.) A chequered white and black buoy, on the E. end of the W. sand, in 3 fms., with Berthior Church just shut in behind the S.TiV. point of Beaux Id., bearing S. i W., and Patience Id. and Two-heads Id. are touching E. i S., to be left on the port hand going up. BAYFIELD ISLANDS He to the westward of Crane Id,, exclusive of a number of small islets and rocks. The principal isles are Canoe Isle, which lies northward of Crane Id. ; then Margaret Id., If m. W. of Crane Id. Lt. ; the next westward is Grosse Id., and the Isle aux Beaux, and the westernmost is Madame. The whole of these islands, from Crane Id. to the W. end of Madame Id., occupy a space of 14 m. There are several passages between those islands, with a good depth, loading into the Middle Channel. The quarantine station is at Grosse Id. ; the entrance is between it and Margaret Id., wliioh is marked by a red buoy on the S. and a chequered buoy on the N. side : course in is about N. by E. Grosse Id. is 2 m. in length, N.B. by E. and S.W. by W., and inhabited. Beaux Id. is about the length of Grosse Id., but narrow, and is about 150 ft. high. Madame Id. is somewhat smaller than Beaux Id. ; both are covered with trees. Prom Madame Id. a rocky roof extends S.W. by W., 2^ m., drying at L.W. ; and ships ought not to go nearer to it than 7 or 8 fms. The mark to clear it is some part of Beaiix Id. kept open to the southward of Madame Id. The western extremity of the reef lies with St. Valiero's Church bearing S. ^ E. A red buoy is placed to mark the western poii\t of this reef, which here divides the western entrance of the North from the South Channel. The B. St. Lawrence is not navigable from the early part of December to the middle of April, on account of the severity of the frosts ; during this period its upper part from Quebec to Kingston, in Upper Canada, and between the lakes, with the exception of Niagara and the Bapids, is frozen over ; but below Quebec, although the river is never wholly frozen, yet the strength of the tides continually detach the masses of ice from the shores, and such immense bodies are kept in incessant agitation, by the flux and reflux, that the navigation becomes impractic- able. At the beginning of May, the ice is either dissolved or carried off by the current. The ISLAND OF ORLEANS bounds the starboard shore from Madame Id. to nearly abreast of Pt. Levy ; its shores generally slope down to the beach, except in some places where small rocky cliffs arise, of neither great extent or elevation. It is well cultivated and very fertile ; its northern shores are flat and muddy, and lined with a reef of rocks, but its southern side is fine^sand, with horo and there a pointed rock. The churches of St. John and St. Lawrence stand near the shore, the distance between them being 5| m. ; this part is highly diversified with gardens and houses. Patrick's Hole is a little to the westward of Pt. St. Lawrence, and is a safe and well-sheltered anchor in 10, 12, or 14 fms., previous cannot be accounted good, but it is _, ^ , river here is bold on each side, being about l:j m. wide. Just to the westward ofl'^^^^.^rn sh the cove stands the telegraph No. 2 ; and on the western part of the point is al|'^P®*'/*Wy in cluster of neat houses, where accommodation of all kinds may be obtained. jiack in time, About a mile to the eastward of the W. end of Orleans are the Marand Rks.,1 ^'^''ips oomi running out 2^ cables' length from the shore ; they will have 6 to 9 ft. over them, ""' being- fa and 10 fms. in sailing past them. At the S.W. part of the island are other rocks, '"ould stand which dry at L.W. ; these are close to the land, and may be safely passed ii '"''them shoi 10 fms. This is the highest part of the island ; and here stands the Church o '."'rent, and 1 St. Peter, about 4 m. from the western point, and nearly opposite the falls o '^*^ >, and wh( Montmorency. "^ vfith the N wei ( Qu( The ext« T the byh on situa Th harbc uiaste on be arriva seen a Por are caj vessel ( I'ccoivo The from ill the capi the fa]], Orleans, The I SOUthoiTl of for 1 DIHEC!! EEMAI Anticosti t that in the its velocity genc!- 1] rut that rapidi depending , has been sa ^ or 3 ft. al Marine 3. fms., with the iiohing, bearing up. , with the S.W. by E. a E. : the istward of Two- og lip. sand, in 3 fms., .ux id., bearing S., to be left on ive of a number . lies northward next westward me. The whole icupy a space of a good depth, Srosse Id. ; the buoy on the S. ihabited. 3 about 150 ft. re covered with Irying at L.W. ; rk to clear it is V The western A red buoy is ies the western 'ecember to the this period its ween the lakes, below Quebec, ies continually ies are kept in mes impraotic- ried off by the m Madame Id. beach, except it or elevation, id muddy, and °rc and there a near the shore, iversified with . St. Lawrence, md commonly e; the ground gales, and the le westward of the point is &, (tained. Marand Rks.J ft. over them, re other rocks, afely passed ii' the Church oi e the falls of extends to Cane\? ^^EBEO may be r-^-""^ ' *^« ^ater K ^'""^ ^^' Levy to II ni 80 REMABES, ETC. enabled to get through the Narrows ; but should your ship sail badly, yea can take shelter in Trinity Bay, which is described in page 59. When between the S.W. and W. points of Anticosti, both the currents and swell set in shore ; and as the bottoni is bad, anchors wUl not hold ; therefore, the greatest caution Is necessary on the first appearance of a decrease of wind, to endeavour to stand off the land ; as in the event of a calm, you might be set on shore, by the current, near the St. Mary's cliffs, for a heavy swell sets in frequently some hours before there is any wind. When off the west end of Anticosti, with a fair wind, steer well to the north- ward, so as to keep out of the strength of the current, steering about W.N.W., or towards English Pt. ; when you have run better than half the distance, you must steer more southerly towards Pt. de Monts, and endeavour to make the Lt. Observe, this Lt.-ho. is npt on the extreme point, but 1^ m. N.E. of it; and there are rooks ^ a mile from this point : in clear weather the Lt. can be seen 16 or 18 m. (See remarks p. 59.) In thick weather this is a most dangerous part of the navigation ; for when the wind is fair it is generally thick ; and the greatest caution is necessary when approaching this pciit ; the ship should be put under snug canvas, and the deep- sea lead kept going ; for if you are to the northward of the point, soimdings will be obtained 5 or 6 m. from the land, in 40 to 50 fms. Captain Bayfield, in his general remarks on the navigation of the St. Lawrence, says, " There is another source of error, independent of charts altogether, which it is astonishing to find obtaining so little attention, particularly in the merchant- service, considering how much has been written CDnccming it of late years. I allude to the deviation, or local attraction of the needle. "An opinion is prevalent that the compasses of vessels are disturbed in the Gulf and B. St. Lawrence, and such disturbancr Las been attributed to the magnetic ores of iron in the hills, particularly those of the N. coast. The magnetic oxide of iron does exist abuQdantly, and attracts the needle very powerfully at some points ; particularly along the coast from the Bay of Seven Ids. eastward. Among the Mingan Ids. we found the variation to vary, from this cause, from 19° to 31" W. At Port Neuf , and on Manicougan Pt. the needle was also disturbed ; but these effects were only noticed when the instruments were placed on the shore. In two instances only, when sailing within 2 m. of the shore, have we observed any effect of the kind upon the compasses on board the Oulnare, and then only to the amount of a few degrees. "When running from place to place, at greater distances from the coast, nothing of the kind has been noticed ; so that in nine cases out of tt^n, where this .erroneous reckoning has been alleged as the cause of accidents to vessels, they originated either in errors of the chart, or in the local attraction on board the vessels themselves." Capt. Bayfield farther adds : — " To render the effect of deviadon apparent, I will 'suppose it to amount to a point of the compass, no uncommon occurrence in a six or a eight point course, and the ship to be staering W. by S. ^ S., by the compass in the binnacle ; she will then, in reality, be making a S.W. by W. 5 W. course, which would soon put her the F floast ; an event that would be accelerated by the current, ;' of ijiamming, she would have on her starboard bow, checking her on shore od which, inst* in-shore. "A case c the 8th of c oil ain cables :.,ctly similar to tiie one I have supposed, occurred on the night of ptember, 1831, when the ship Jane, of Belfast, having several large and other extra iron on board, by which the deviation must have been n'eatly increased, ran stem on to Bicquette, with a fair wind, but thick fog. She was steering the regular course up the middle of the estuary, 1 t her master was quite unaware of the effect of the great mass of iron in her hold upon her compasses ; and equally so, that previous to the accident which caused the total loss of his vessel, he had been running for many miles, in less than 20 fms., the bank of soundings not being hid down on his chart. il badly, you can lurrents and swell i; therefore, the rease of wind, to . might be set on sets in frequently 3II to the north- bout W.N.W., or stance, you must io make the Lt. of it; and there I seen 1 5 or 18 m. •n; for when the necessary when s, and the deep- ^, soimdings will le St. Lawrence, Itogether, which n the merchant- t of late years. rbed in the Gulf to the magnetic agnetic oxide of at some points; rd. Among the )m 19" to 31" W. rbed ; but these I shore. In two erved any effect y to the amount e coast, nothing e this .erroneous they originated ard the vessels to amount to a it point course, made; she will Id soon put her )y the current, V, checking her on the night of ? several large ion must have J ^ind, but thick I stuary, 1 t her her hold upon [ iich caused the s than20fms., vessels; these may flrsStr' S'^"^ l^t^mt^ri'^,^^-h^tB ffi' very low tk "*? "^^ *^e8e coves out fn- +1, '. °"* you must be i«'f i,j ^ '°°* *" on the starboard tect L*n u southward from Pi^ ^. t,t tdTf' ^^*b«r?t'i?3V Jr^'«*' ^^^^ienlnXit^.^ the south coa?t r?; ''! ''■"' "oattered filw'f/''™ i" '""nd hismL^Tfj '" «■= H. of GREAT MATIS. weather, and not be certain of her distance, if she should be near Father Pt., she cannot approach the land without gradually shoaling her water ; consequently, keeping the lead going, and being in 9 or 10 fms., should she make an island suddemy to the southward, it must be Bamaby Id. And if falling in with an island suddenly, without having hove the lead, in any bearing to the westward of W.S.W., one oast of the lead will reduce it to a certainty; for with Bamaby bearing more to th- westward than W.S.W., there will be, on approaching it, under 10 fms. ; while with the Id. of Bio on the same bearings you will have from 15 to 12 fms. Again, if the lead be kept going, and no soundings be found, then, falling in with land suddenly ahead, it must be Bioquette ; for there is deep water in the stream of Bicquette, and when it bears S., 2 m., there are 30 fms. ; and within 1| m. of the N.W. reef there is the same depth ; a little off there are 60 fms. : there are 12 fms. close to both the island and reef. In the stream of Bioquette, when it bears W.S.W., if you shotdd have 15 fms., and see no land, if you are strangers, the safest way wiU be to haul off towards the northward, into 19 or 20 fms., and steer W.S.W. and W. by S., according to the depth; that course will lead to the N. of Bic. The current between Mille Yache and Bio Id. will always be f oimd strong to the N.E. ; this must be particularly attended to, as it might drift you towards the Manicouagan Shoals. If desirous of anchoring on the S. side of Bio, and the wind should be easterly, run boldly to the southward, looking out for the reef at the E. end of the island : give this reef a berth of ^ of a mile, and run along in mid-channel until you find Cape Arignole bears S.S.E. ; the body of the island then bearing N.N.W. Large ships may anchor in 11 fms., the ground clear and good ; but small vessels may run on until the island comes N.E., and the depth 8 fms. ; you will then be ^ a mile off the island, but the bottom will not be so clear as when you are in the deeper water. Fresh water may be obtained in the cove to the westward of the E. end of the island. In foggy weather it is not recommended to run inside of Bio without a pilot, unless by persons very well acquainted. The revolving Lt. on Bioquette Id. cannot fail to be of the greatest service to those navigating this part of the river. (See p. 66). But, if the wind should be westerly, and you are to windward of the island, intending to anchor there, stand to the southward, into 11 fms., then nm down and anchor, as before directed ; for, with little wind, 11 fms. is the proper depth of the fairway, and the last half -flood and all the ebb sets strongly between Bioquette and Bic. Should you, with an easterly wind, be too far to the westward to fetch round tho E. end of Bic, then, in order to gain the anchorage, you should give Bioquette a berth of about ^ a mile ; run up until the W. end of Bic bears S.E., th^n Cape Arignole will be open of it. This latter mark leads to the westward of a reef, which is covered at quarter- tide, and extends S.W. by W., a mile from Bioquette ; while another reef, always visible, lies between the f ormeiv and Bicquette. It also clears the N.W. reef. By hauling round to the southward, with Cape Arignole open, you will pass athwart the opening between Bic and Bicquette, in from 13 to 6 fms. You cannot cross tho West Grounds of Bic with these latter marks on ; you must keep more to the westward. Come no nearer the west end of Bic than o or 6 fms. ; as the reef runs off W. by S., | of a mile. The N.W. reef of Bic will bo cleared by keeping the W. end of that island and Cape Arignole in a line, bearing S.E. When you are beating into Bic Harbour from the westward, while standing to tho southward, take care not to shut in Mount Camille with Cape Arignole ; and in standing to the northward, do not shut in Mount Camille with Bic Id. TIDES. — The tides flow at Bic Id., F. and C, at 2h. 15 m. ; and rise, in spring- tides, 12 or 14 ft., neap-tides 7 or 8 ft. The flood-tides never bend to the westward till an hour's flood by the shore, and in neap-tides the floods are very weak ; but in spring-tides ships will ahvnys find a flood-tide from Father Pt. to Bic Id. parJ totl or ll Gree Id. at Bl s.w.r Thee 35 fm Green burth betwe theE. giving the an( of Base if nece' here an Greei tides thi a dark o when th Ked and towards a time i heave- to or Bicqui westwan groxmd it Vessels and have tide be d( the ledge, the ledge. The hi^ clear of tl be exacth vessels ire but it will be caught Should ; the weatht 9 m. ; you W.S.W., o: a mile or wind shift spent, Stan then ancho Ahev Pt., she consequently, ike an island g in with an westward of ith Bamaby preaching it, lU have from 3n, falling in water in the «nd within ) fms. : there Btte, when it re strangers, 20 fms., and lead to the brong to the towards the be easterly, the island : til you find W. Large i^essels may hen be ^ a I are in the trard of the m inside of rolving Lt. gating this the island, I run down jper depth y between itch round s Bicquette than Cape of a reef, Bicquette ; 3. It also 3 Arignole Prom 13 to narks on ; Bic than sland and i Harbour o shut in d, do not n spring- lioro, and ivays find The edge of 5^''^*^<* Apple Ids wh\-n^ if ^"."^^^^ *t ^°""«' heav^fto ofF^^f/ «^'P «afely thSul ^*t''^"^«« «« "xfenW^L?! *^^« ««*« a«Uoi, the ground i« good. '"'•' °' *«^^ards White Id.t'tog ovUmT I 84 RED ISLAND. — GREEN ISLAND 'i'O THE BRANDY I'OTS. RED ISLAND.— Ve88«l« comiiig up the river, und giving the 8ou ware this boari large cross In will water to, t N.W. tho ward best tho riv On A shi^ the Bn tid: of a re and bo: NE. bj FllOM Tho pa! Ground, near L.l the ancfl On the i lies abrd black ani Ground i the Midd The ch; S.W. pon between ] on the N. now pick this is th S.W. i W Id. Bk. tl H. bank o' At nigh Pots, you up by the high as th tho Hare ! Andre Bk. load. WTi up to tho I in 10 fms. There is j tween the ] in tho S.W you will fii Hare Id. Ri is S.W. by shore, from the latter di TS. loni shore ti ) Lt.-ho. on dangnrous W.; theic- roj'ii Id. Lt. hill 4 in. of rs, wait tho ■ borrow on the north- li the ahoal ngly down ark to run the Brandy jhor on thu tides hero ho buoy be ars the reef ho distance ) fms. ; yet 08, but you ot stand to ; but Millo HurroundH aarly 4 m. ; L.W., and e obtained rms a deep 10 ni. At e Isles; to th a hand- ract notice mall inlots, ling boats, nd Bed Id. I the floods y a sudden land reefs, I Hare Ids. laul to tho id buoy is een Id. to ; between fairway or There is Is keeping lese rocks, i-channcl. I formerly ountain of 8 will lead is a white 1 Ledge. UlUNDY rOTS TO lUE TBAVmsE A„n Tlj" lKi«t p,«l„^ i, ,„ ,.„ .^ •""■""'*■ ""D GOOSE I8„ boarme N.E. 1 !■; • bu. ,L °-.l"" ■'"'"fag ii. S thi s w °.» ■"«* U'rouri, to, Ihere being 8 fa,. olo,o i„ .i? • '"™^'' *" 'k' BranJvPn,. ?? i"'" "<> 1«m tho--a;Sag";;;'urr"^^'^i^"«^''^^ es abreast of the BrandrPot ir"*^ i^Vl^ood a wh/ o buov /^"°^ upwards. Wack and white buoy on R„. **.';' ''"^ ""»% u miln H w^' ^/^^ Pago 69); it Groundisaredbuov o^thnr^n' ^^^^^o; and near ?h«%v5^- °^ *h« chequiki the Middle GrounSTnyX: b"o?wol*il'' ^V«"d ofHar: fd\%°^ *^« Middle y V pick up SotheT'ik JXS"^y 'lP^«-d^^^^^^^^ th^is the N. side o? Burnt ?3 ^^^^'^^^^^^ the pferfiis^' ^i^^*^*^' ^o" wil J^d. Bk the river is all dear i^ +1 " P*^* *he red buov on It^Ttx? ^^^nde Id., There is no passage for shinning f .u ^' ^'''' ""^^ ^««P off twien the Pilgrims and Tfor.^^^,*'' *h« southward of f J,,, p-i • ^" /h«.f -W. laid S Ihe g^aT?^^^^ ' ^^o m-k for^tiSt'-^ ^^"^ b- you will find 20 fms infr^^J^ , °^ ^amouraska- in sfaL- i°^ ^« »ot to shut Hareld.Eeef. Th?dir^p?"''''^°"^^' ^^^ tack the Vst sh,f t°^ t° *^« "orthw^d is S. W. by W i W ,Jf + ?^"^ ^™'^ tJ'e Pilgrims fnflf%;^^ f *'* ^O" have from shore, ftiVm^afkaToMt'h"-' "^'^ "-Kan^hom^^^i^^^^^ff sJ'^^^^ the latter distance inT.: tid^ '"^^'- ^^ ^ --el, ^ShTgoSS fce,\^S IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 1.25 ■^ l&i 122 ^ L£ 12.0 Wtau 4" Hiotographic Sciences Corporation ^ 5V <^ ^ \ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MStO (716)872-4'S03 '^ '/J 86 KAMOURASKA. — THE TRAVERSE. EAMOTJBASEA ISLANDS are Great Id., Burnt Id., and Orow Id. ; the two former are steep-to, but near Crow Id. the bank becomes shallow. To the south- ward of Orow lid. is a place where vessels may wax on shore with safety; the mark for going in is, to open the church 3 sails' breadth to the west of Crow Id., bearing E.S.E., and steer in. With spring-tides you have 14 ft., and with neaps 10 ; the ground being all soft mud. Cape Diable bears from Orow Id. S.W. by W., distant 3 m. ; and the eastern- most part of the reef runs from it to within a mile of Orow Id, ; therefore vessels from the westward should stretch along this reef, in 6 fms., and then haul in tot the church, agreeably to the mark just given. There are two openings in the reefs, but strangers must not attempt either. With easterly winds, ships that have lost their anchors may run for the cove to the southward of Cape Diable ; to enter which you shoidd bring the church and Crow Id. in the direction before stated ; and having got within the reefs, run up westerly, leaving a small islet above the church on your port side, then put the ship on shore in the S.W. part of the cove, and she will be safe ; but if the wind be westerly, run her aground a little to the eastward of the church. The TBAYEBSE. — From abreast of Cape Diable, distant 2 m., your course to the Traverse will be S.W. by W. f W., 15 m. This will lead you direct to the Lt. -vessel, and past the black buoy off St. Anne. The channel of the Traverse is buoyed by four black buoys on the south bank, to be left on your port hand going up ; and two red buoys on the Middle Ground, on yotir starboard hand ; also by the chequered buoy of the Channel Patch. Your course through the narrows, from abreast the Lt.- vessel, will be S.W., 4^ m., along the edge of St. Boque's iJhoal, up to the third black buoy, and from thence S.W. | S., 3 m., to the chequered buoy on the Patch ; continue on to the southward of the Stone Pillar Lt. and South Rk. (see p. 74) ; and from thence a S.W. by W. ^ W. course will take you past Goose Id. Beef towards Crane Id. TIDES. — As the tides here run strongly, allowance must be made for them, whether ebb or flood. In entering the Traverse with little wind, you ought to be careful to make proper allowance for the first part of the flood-tide, for that sets strongly towards the point of St. Boque's Bk. In going through, if more than half-flood, be guarded against the S.W. by W. set, and always keep the south bank on board ; but when above the Pillars, the tide sets fair up the river. In beating into and through this passage, be careful to tack from side to side on the first shoal cast of the lead, but more particularly so on the edge of the Middle Ground; and observe, that the ship will go faster over towards the Middle Ground than toward the shoals of St. Boque ; and, if there be but little wind, be sure to borrow on the south side of tha channel. Should the flood be done and your ship in the narrows, or between the buoys, and any circumstance makes it necessary for you to anchor, do not bring-to in the channel, but on either side as most convenient, and come-to in 7 fms. After half- ebb the tides will be found to be more moderate. In the deep water iixey run very strongly ; therefore if you are obliged to anchor here, take care to give a good scope of cable before the stream comes strong; for should your anchor start, you may have to cut from it, as it seldom will tt^e a fresh hold, the ground in every part of the Traverse being bard, foul, and unfit for holding well. Farther on, at or about the Pillars, the tides have less velocity, being seldom more than 3§ knots an hour ; ships therefore will find good riding, with easterly winds, about 2 m. to the north-eastward of the South Pillar, in 7 fms., or to the southward of it, in a similar depth, on good ground. From abreast of the Stone Pillar to Crane Id. your course will be nearly S.W. by W. 5 W., and the distance 10 m. In your progress you will pass Goose Id. Beef and Beaujeu'^ Bk. ; both of which have been described in pp. 74, 75. Crane Id. is a little above Goose Id., to which it is connected by low meadow laud. The southern side of this part of the channel is formed by a muddy flat, with regular soundings as you approach, and 3 fms. over it, having good anchorage . 8( all wh the I wh( for Hos havi] 18 ft Id. To the open marki theB< Id.Lt Bk. an Chann AN( Crane! body o: winds, when ai weathei of losin From the disti off St. 1 Belle CI ceeding i run onii of Crane ■which ru] Crane Id ground ; the point, be abreasl TheWj 6 fms., ar westward «t. Valiere Wheny( ward, but Grosse Id. latter shall the way to quite acros along good Should si Madame Is] find a good the ground Should tl above the H Should th< "larks given (d. ; the two 'o the south- yy; the mark f Crow Id., 1 with neaps the eastem- efore vessels L haul in fot ings in the ■ the cove to I church and eefs, run up len put the if the wind ur course to irect to the I Traverse is hand going ad; also by le narrows, St. Boque's m., to the >tone Pillar course will I for them, ol to make jfly towards f-flood, be : on board ; ide to side idge of the the Middle e wind, be the buoys, g-to in the After half- r they run to give a Lchor start, ground in ng seldom th easterly » or to the be nearly pass Qoose i)p. 74, 75. w meadow luddy flat, anchorage TIDES, ANCHOBAGES, ETC. ^thewavbnf^i, -«^«obages, ETC. ^^g 4 fms. between it a«5 «. v ^ °° * Patch Ivinir L-* ^^-^ soft mud To clear Beaujeu'sBk if ^-f,, , ^ " *^® "^^ W on Goose ceedmg from Crane W description of thesA ,lo^ ^ ^^osse Id. and «/» ^ When you have arrived abov lu ^'"^ *° *^' souSrd ^T £« ^ard, but nof dZi above Marffarflf b m *• mmmimm 88 QUARANTINE. Should thoy be oblig-od to run for a harbour below Bio Id., Old Bio furnishes a proper place to run rjshore : and to the southward of Bamaby Id. a ship will be equally safe. LittTd Metis Cove is a good place for a vessel on emergency to take refuge in. (See y^^ 64.) As the ice soraetimes sets in suddenly, should vessels be caught at that season, all the places p.bove-mentioned will be proper and safe to winter in ; and also in the space between Camouraska and the Pilgrims : but at all times they shoiild be hove up to fl.W. mark, spring-tides. QUABANTINE. — All merchant vessels, as the law now stands (in 1860), are obliged to anchor off Grosse Id., from whence, after examination, they are allowed to proceed to Quebec, if not detained at the quarantine anchorage. These vessels, in the first instance, generally anchor outside Grosse Patch, and to the westward of Margaret's Tail, in 6 fms. This is one of the best roadsteads for riding out an easterly gale in the river. Ships being up so far as Belle Ohiuse Ids., should stand no nearer to them than 8 fms. ; nor to Madame Ids. than 6 fms. : the channel here is about 1^ m. over. S.W. by W., 3 m. from the W. end of Madame Id., a rooky shoal runs out, which dries at L.W. : come not nearer to it than 8 fms. ; but always keep some part of Beaux Id. open to the southward of Madame Id., and you will be sure to pass to the southward of the shoal in safety ; and when St. Yaliere Church bears S.S.E., you will perceive it to be in one with an old windmill; you will then be to the westward of the danger, for the western end of the shoal bears from St. Yaliere Chiuoh directly N. From Belle Ohasse to Ft. St. Yaliere you will have 8 fms. a31 along the fairway of the channel ; but having passed St. Yaliere Pt. it deepens to 11 or 12 fms. From St. Yaliere to Quebec the course is "W. by S. J S., for about 9 m., or up to St. Lawrence Pt., in Orleans, both shores being bold-to; you may, therefore, borrow en the northern side to 7 or 8 fms., and the southern to 8 ; while in the middle of the channel there are 16, 17, and 18 fms., all the way to abreast of the Church of St. Lawrence, where vessels may anchor towards the Id. of Orleans, in from 16 to 10 baa. ; but the ground from St. Yaliere Pt. up to Quebec is not good for holding. As you advance towards St. Lawrence Pt. the channel narrows, being not above a mile across ; on the opposite point stands the Church of Beaumont ; between this and the Church of St. Lawrence, bearing from each other S.S.W. and N.N.E., is a large rocky shoal, extending almost half over the channel, and drying at L.W. : uus is dangerous and steep-to, having 10 fms. close to its edge ; you must therefore be careful to avoid it, by making short boards imtil you are fairly above St. Lawrence Pt. ; then you may safely stand to the southward into 10 fms. (p. 76). From Pt. St. Lawrence steer W. by N. towards Pt. Levj', the distance being 7 m. About 1^ m. to the westward of St. Lawrence is St. Patrick's Hole, a roadstead for vessels bound outward, with easterly winds, but 'the ground does not hold well ; the river here is a mile wide, and ships may tack into 10 fms. ; in the middle of the river are 19 fms. In proceeding alon^ the N. shore, you must give the Marand's Bks. a berth; they lie about a mile from the W. end of the Id. of Orleans, and have only 6 to 9 ft. over them; pass them in 12 fms. There is also a reef stretching from the W. end of Orleans, but come not into less than 10 fms., and there will be no danger. Another small reef runs to the northward from Pt. Levy ; but it lies close in shore, and requires only a moderate berth. Having arrived at Pt. Levy, steer W.S.W. for Quebec, the distance being only 2 m.; on the northern side of the passage lie the Beauport Shoals, which are readily cleared, by coming into not less than 10 fms. In the day-time the mark for the eastern part of these shoals, which have ^ome rocky patches among them, is the small steeple of the Boman Cathedral and the steeple of the English Cathe- dral in one, bearing S. 36° W. ; therefore keep the small steeple open to the north- ward of the English Cathedral, and running up keep the above small steeple midway between the two large ones : observe that the Roman Cathedral has two steeples on it, the small one standing at the E. end, and the large one at its W. end Boi T east does Oblij abre 11 fr requi near and ; Biam Queb they Th( WW flowL and tl Comm Tee ballast and ar( bearN The; it is di Bapids ▼enr ea« and adc and adji generaU of comni From cline, an tide enti Trois Bi entrance formerly length, at with nun navigable alight- v€ distance, '. struoted l so great, should wc the botton the banks MONTI oonvenieni but vessels both delivi from 3 to which is at out the bez within 2 m Steamers sengers; at towing at C [G. & R. i imislies a p will be sy to take at season, id also in should be 186O0, are re allowed sse vessels, } westward ling out an them than IJ m. over, out, which ome part of s to pass to ears S.S.E., en be to the I St. VaUere ve 8 fms. all t deepens to m., or up to y, therefore, while in the breast of the f Orleans, in is not good ig not above [nt; between and N.N .B., id drying at te; you must fairly above fms. (p. 76). je being 7 m. a roadstead )es not hold ,a the middle lust give the >f the Id. of there is also fhan 10 fms., :d from Pt. |e being only which are 18 the mark Imong them, Iglish Cathe- |o the north- aall steeple ^al has two |ne at its W. BASIN OP QUEBEC. — MONTREAL. 89 end ; both churches are covered with tin ; the English steeple is a spire, and the Boman has two cupolas. Thk basin of QUEBEC— Shii>8 arriving at Quebec, with a flood-tide and easterly wind, should take in their sails and have their cables ready, for the ground does not hold well; the tides are commonly strong, and the water deep. If obliged to come-to in the middle of the stream, they will have from 16 to 20 fms. abreast of the town ; but within 2 cables' length of the wharves- there will be 11 fms., and here the vessel may easily be brought up ; while in the offing it will require 60 fms. On the Pt. Levy side is a depth of 30 fms., and strong tides ; near the wharves they will not be so strongly felt ; but should the wind be violent, and from the eastward, the best riding will be above the wharves, abreast of Diamond Harbour, in 10 fms. The great annoyance to vessels at anchor off Quebec, are the larg^ rafts of timber dropping down with a Strong ebb-tide; they often get athwurt hawse, and do them injury, by starting their anchors, &o. The North Bastion at Quebec is in lat. 46" 49' 0' and long. 71° 12' 46', variation 16" W. It is H. W., F. and 0., at 6h. 37m. ; in an easterly gale spring-tides will flow 20 ft. The velocity of the tides off the town wharves are, the floods 3 knots, and the ebbs 4 knots. The floods run about 4| hours, and the ebbs 7} hours. Common springs rise about 18 ft., and neaps 13 ft. The BAIjLAST GBOUND is the place appointed for vessels to discharge their ballast in ; this is to the westward of two beacons on the S. shore, above Quebec, and are placed on the brow of a hill near Charles Cove, which, when in a line, bear N.W. and S.E. of each other. The B. St. Lawrence extends from Quebec to the dty of Montreal, from which it is distant 155 m., and from the island of Bic 270 m. ; it is navigable to the Bapids of Biohelieu for vessels of 600 tons; the imjpediments are few, and those venr easily surmounted. The banks of the river are in a high state of cultivation, and adorned with numerous towns and villages, most of which are built around and adjacent to a church, which commonly makes a handsome appearance, and is generally a stone edifice ; while single houses and farms keep up a regular kind of communication. From Quebec, the shores of whicl are exceedingly lofty, the hills gradually de- cline, and become less elevated, until you reach the river St. Maurice, where the tide entirely ceases; here, on the N. side of the river stands the town of the Trois Bivieres. Beyond Trois Bivieres, 33 m., is the Bichelieu Bapid : at the entrance of which, and above the LaJce St. Pierre, is the town of Wiluam Henr^, formerly called Sorel. Lake St. Pierre, which is between the towns, is 22 m. m length, and in some places nearly 8 in breadth ; but its western part is encumbered with numerous islands, which divide it into several channels, two of which are navigable ; but that on the S. is the cleanest, deepest and best, and is pointed out by a light- vessel and buoy. The banks here are low, and shelve off to a considerable distence, leaving only a narrow channel of from 12 to 18 ft : the river here is ob- structed by masses of rock, and at the ebb-tide the descent of the rapid becomes so great, that the utmost caution must be taken to pass it; vessels, therefore, should wait for the proper time of tide, and, if necessary, they may anchor at the bottom of the rapid till a proper opportunitv offers. From hence to Montreal, the banks are of moderate height, and uniformly level. MONTBEAL is considered the most fertile part of Lower Canada : its port is convenient, and situated on the S.E. side of the city. The harbour is not large, but vessels drawing 15 ft., can lie dose to the shore, near the Market Gate, and both deliver and receive their cargoes with es^tedilion: the depth is generally from 3 to 4^ fms. : its great inconvenience arises from the rapid of St. Manr, which is about a mile below, and the current is sometimes so powerful, that with- out the benefit of a N.E. wind, or a steam-tug, vessels maybe detained for weeks, within 2 m. of the spot where their freight should be delivered. Steamers run regularly between Quebec and Montreal, with goods and pas- sengers; and ships bound to Montreal with cargoes, may engage steamers for towing at Quebec. There is a regular rato of charges for towing ships, according [G. & E. S*. Laurence.] k 90 TIDES, ETC. to their draught and breadth of beam, for the whole or any intermediate distance that may be required. !E^om Quebec to Montreal the steamers generally perform their passages in 18 hours, and return from Montreal to Querao in about 14 hours; this includes stoppages at William Henryand Trois Bivieres of about an hour each. The laws of the Trinity Hoiise are very strict with ren>ect to shipping in the Harbour and Fort of Quebec; and reqiiire the masters of vessels to pay a proper observance of them. The regulations relative to quarantine, the pilot is oom- Eelled to make them acquainted with so soon as he comes on board ; and the^ arbour-master will deliver a copy of the laws of the harbour on their arrival ; besides which the tlifferent laws are always kept open to view at the harbour- master's office. TIDES. — On the days of the F. and 0. of the moon, the tides will be found to flow nearly as follow : — At Seven Ids. Bay it is H. W. at Ih. 40m. ; at Ft. de Monts at 2h. ; at Mani- oouagan Bay at 2h. ; Bersimes Ft. at 2h. ; at Tadousao, B. Saguenay entrance, at 2h. 45m. ; and at St. Faul's Bay at 4h. 25m. Near Gape Chatte at 2h. ; at Metis at 2h. 10m. ; at Bic Id. at 2h. 15m. ; at Ghreen Id. at 2h. 45m. ; at the Brandy Fots at 3h. 30m. ; at tiie S. l^averse at 4h. 30m. ; at Crane Id. at 5h. 15m. ; and at Quebec at 6h. 37m. At Sevoi Ids. Bay spring-tides rise 9 ft., neaps 5 ft. Ft. de Monts „ 11 „ 6. Manicouagan Bay ,, 12 „ 7. Bersimes Ft „ 12 „ 7. Tadousac, Saguenay B., . . . . „ 17 » ^0. St. Faul's Bay .\. „ 16 „ 10. Gape Chatte „ 12 „ 8. Matan „ 12 or 13 „ 8. Metis „ 13 „ 8. Biold. „ 14 „ 9. Green Id „ 16 „ 9^. Brandy Fots „ 16 „ 9. S. Traverse „ 18 „ 11. Crane Id „ 17 „ 11. Quebec ,, 18 „ 13. At the Isle of Bic the stream never bends to the westward until an hour's flood by the shore. Here the neap-floods are very weak, and with westerly winds, no tide will be perceptible. A spring-flood is, however, always found within 4 m. of the shore, between Father Ft. and Bic Id. Hence, all the way to Quebec, the tide, when regular, flows tide and quarter-tide; but it is always influenced greatly by the wind, and by no means to be depended on, as'^to its running anywhere below Hare Id., where there is a regpilar stream of both flood and ebb. Between Bamaby and Bic the stream of flood sets in from the N.E. at the rate of about 1| knot an hour ; then fair through the channel until the last quarter- flood, when it sets to the N.W., by the W. end of Bio, and then gradually to the N.E. as the flood slacks. The whole of the ebb, both to the eastward and west- ward of the island, sets strongly to the N.E. The current between Bicqnette and the N. coast is generally very sbeong to the N.E., without any regular change. In the summer and autunan, as well as in spring-tides, this current slacks, and near Bioquette, runs to the westward, during flood ; but, until the upland waters have all run down, and the great rivers have discharged the freshes, caused by the thawing of the snows m the spring of the year, this current will always run downward. From Bio to Green Id., on the southern side, the stream of flood is nowhere perceptible at 1| m. from the islands. The ebb, or rather current, comes strongly m)m the N.W. out of the B. Saguenay, and through the channel to the northward of Bed Id. Here it always runs in a B.E. direction, 2i'ta, an hour, with e. westerly distance isages in includes ig in tbe a proper ; is com- and tbe^ r arrival; harliour- ) found to at Mani- entrance, »t 2h. ; at 1.; at the oie Id. at lour's flood -winds, no thin 4 m. of iuebec, the [iced greatly anywhere TIDES, ETC. 91 wind, but only so to the southward and eastward of Red Id. Between Bed Id. and Oreen Id., the ebb runs from 4 to 6 knots. In crossing over to the N. shore, this easterly current will be found to diminish ; for, on the N. side, the flood is pretty regular, and the ebb much weaker. Eastward of the Bazade Bks., and near Bic, the current assumes a N.E. direction, and setj stronely between Bio and Bicquette. To the southward of Bic, spring-floods run at the rate of 1| knot ; neaps are not perceptible. Ships that come to the southward of Bio, with a scant wind from the northward, should steer W. by N., to check th& S.E. current, until they come into 18 fms., or up to Basque, whence they may proceed for Oreen Id. The first of the flood, with spring-tides, sets from tbe N.E. along the N. side of Gbeen Id., and strongly towards the W. end of it ; then S.S.W. over the reef towards Caoona. In the middle of the channel no flood is perceptible. At 2 m. to the southward of Bed Id. it sets strongly to the N.W., and the ebb contrary. Diiring spring-ebbs the meeting of the N.E. and S.E. tides, near the middle of Green Id., causes very strong ripplings ; and to the eastward of Oreen Id. the S.E. ebb comes strongly about the E. end of Bed Id. ; here meeting the N.E. tide causes a hieh ripj^ing, much like broken water in strong easterly winds : but in neap-tides, the floods are very weak, and in the spring of the year there are none ; thus rendering this part of the river more tedious in its navigation than any other, unless with a free wind. From the W. end of Oreen Id. a regular stream of flood and ebb commences ; which runs 5 hours upward, and 7 downward. At the Brandy Pots it flows tide and quarter-tide : and above the Percee Bks., on the S. shore, it sets regularly up and down, N.E. by E., and S.W. by "W. From the Brandy Pots, the stream of flood sets towards Hare Id. ; and near the W. end, N.W., with great strength, through the passage between the island and shoal. Above Hare Id,, the flood sets regularly up the river ; the ebbs contrary. From* the Pilgrims up to Oape Diable the flood is very weak, but it thence increases up to the buoys of the Traverse, where it runs at the rate of 5 knots. The first of the ebb sets towards the Hare Id. Shoal, when abreast of the greater island of Kamoiiraska, and the flood contrary. At the Traverse, on the F. and C, the tide on shore flows at 4h. 30 m., but it continues to run to the westward until 6 o'clock, when regular in the channel. With westerly winds there is a deviation, but it is certain that the tide on shore rises 3 ft. before the stream bends to the -westward : and this allowance must always be made in every part of the river. In the Traverse the first of the flood sets from the N.N.E. ; at the buoys, at Suarter-flood, it takes a S.W. direction ; and when the sho^ are covered at half- ood, ai the Seal Beefs, it sets until high water, S.W. by W. The ebbs, in a contrary direction, run with great strength ; frequently, in the spring of the year, at the rate of 6 or 7 knots. From Crane Id. the flood sets fairly up the river, but the first of the ebb of L'Islet sets to the northward for ^ an hour, then fair down the river, at the rate of not more than 3} knots an hour, with spring-tides. lis nowhere les strongly \ northward B westerly ,*> 92 > t DIRECTIONS FOR VESSELS BOUND DOWN THE GULF. Remarks on thx passaoe down thb Biveb.— Vessels generally stop at the Brandy Pots for a fair wind ; but supposing, after they have passed Green Id., that the fair wind fai^, and they are met by an easterly wind before arriving near the Island of Bio, it is recommended in that case to ran up again to the Brandy Pots, especially if late, or very early in the navigable season ; for all they wiU gain b^ beating about in thick weather, probably for severiJ days and nights in succession, will not be worth the risk; but if they have arrived far enough down at the commencement of the easterly wind, the Ituand of Bio affords gooa shelter and anchorage, which should be sought in time, before the fog commences (see p. 66). There is no other anchorage lower down nearer than the Seven Ids., and after that, Oasp^. Vessels without a pilot should be cautious in attempting to run inside of the Island of Bic in foggy weather, unless very well acquanted. When leaving the Brandy Pots with a northerly wind and ebb-tide, keep well under White la. Beef, to prevent your being set over to Qreen Id. Beef by the strength of the tide. When beating down at night, or in thick weather, the South Bk. should be your guide. Tou should tack from it, after striking soundings on its edge, and should not stand to the northward more than half -channel over in any part; thus keeping in the strength of the current down, and avoiding the possibility of accidents from the shoals on the north coast, which, being very steep, and affording little or no warning by the lead, have proved fatal to many vessels. Under these circumstances, there is no safety unless the lead be kept constantly going when approaching the south coast. In the board to the southward, saiT should be sufficiently reduced for soundings to be easily obtained, and every thing in readiness to tack, or wear, at the shortest notice. These precautions become more necessary as the vessel descends the river, and the bank of soundings becomes narrower. Off Matan there are 30 fms., sandy bottom, 1^ m. from the shore, and 60 fms., 3 m. off; at 5 m. off, no bottom will be found at 100 fms. The south Bk. becomes still narrower to the eastward of Matan, and ceases in consequence, to be of use to vessels. Off Cape Ghatte there are 30 fms., little more than ^ a mile from the shore. Below Cape Chatte there is plenty of room ; and the chart will show that there are soundings in various depths, between 50 and 100 fms. from off the western end of Anticosti, to nearly opposite the Seven Ids., and also between the W. and S.W. points of Anticosti ; but eastward of the S.W. point, the bank is very narrow, as far as Pavilion Pt. ; from thence to Heath Pt. there is sufficient warning by the deep-sea lead, as will be seen by the chart. It. FINIS. STRAKEU BRUS. AND CO., PKINTEBS, So, CAMOMILE STREET, CITY. 'HE GULF. rally stop ai the )a88ed Grcen Id., fore arriviiig near tin to the Brandy for all thev will ays and nignts in far enough down 'ords g^oa shelter foommences (see e Seven Ids., and in attempting to 1 aoquanted. >b-tide, keep well I Id. Seef by the k. should be your edge, and should trt; thus keeping ility of accidents 1 affording little Is. Under these Aitly going when , sail should be every thing in )ns become more indings becomes from the shore, fms. The south in consequence, )tle more than show that there off the western between the nt, the bank is lere is sufficient ^iteHMBMaftl CHARTS. CHARLES WILSON, Latb «I. W. NORIE & WILBON, 157, Leaden HALL Street, London. A NEW CHART, ' ON A LARGE SCALE, OF t. A The SKAOEE BAX, or SLEEVE, inclivling the Coasts of Norway and Sweden, from Ekersund and the Naze to Christiania, Gottenburg, and part of the Coast of Jut- land, with ENLARGED PLANS of MaNNE FiORD, ChRISTIAN- suND, Arendal, Christiania, and Gottenburg, and illus- ■, trated with Views of Lighthouses and Beacons 7 6 This Chart and the fallowing, " The Cattegat, Sound and Belts,** or " Scow through the Belts,** will show the whole Naviga- tion from the North Sea to the Baltic on a large and uniform scale. The CATTEOAT, SOTTED, and the OBEAT ana .LITTLE BELTS, &c., including the Navigation from Christiania and the ScAW, through the Sound and Grounds, the Great and Little Belts, and the Coast of Holstein and Mecklen- BERG to Daser Ort, &c., with enlarged plans of Frede- rikshaven, Gottenburg, Hallands V^sedero, the Sound from the Koll to Falsterbo, &c. Plan of Elsinore Har- bour, also the Sprogoe Channel in the Great Belt, and Kiel Harbour, with a Book of Directions 10 6 The SCAW through ijjti IeLTS, and the Coast to Daser Ort, &c., with direction^. ..•#•• 80 The SOXnn) and OBOUHBSi^on a large scale 4 The BALTIC SEA, and directions ^... 8 TheOULFofFIStAHD, and directions 7 The OXJLF of BOTHNIA, and directions 60 1 1*1 m H Hi ■M. m f . PHOTOMOUNT PAMPHLET BINDER P»T NO. i: Manufacluttd by GAYLORO BROS. Inc. S»f«u»». N' ^- 1 S»ocl<»on, Cili<. I t., -■'■',' !.^.ir. -■-•* v~*" 1 ''i|'''iiP^HHH| ^■- '(':,■ \- . - < pi'!' '' ^^^hHI^I ' ~>/ ■ ^■'■" |'|::.;;:''»^H i.' ' '. ■■. j-' .'-•- - ■ V. |;:;i:; v; i^H^| . ■■ -■"'■ ■ ■■''.'■ ' ' ii'lH "V>:^-*'. '■< f'^ 1 • 0ms$^ LIBRARIES THE UNIVERSITY OF WESTERN ONTARIO LONDON CANADA LS-M)U5 K '1 V'1 M y !.■■ ■ ■ Jj' • i'iii :-I— ' -./^^^ <'i i 'i i > '■'" -T':"!* ;